A6000 Operation Guide

Abekas 6000
Operation
Preliminary
Printing Information and Notifications
Publishing and Copyright Information

Abekas 6000 Operation
Part Number 9600-0360-00
Abekas 6000 Installation & Maintenance

Part Number 9600-0372-00
Publishing History
This Printing: October, 1999
Printed in U.S.A.
Copyright
© Accom, Inc. 1999
FCC Compliance
This equipment complies with the requirements in Part 15 of the FCC rules for a Class A computing
device. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference to
radio and TV reception requiring the operator to take whatever staps are necessary to correct the
interference.
Notice
Information contained in the User Guide is not guaranteed and is subject to change without notice
or obligation.
Acknowledgements
Registered product trademarks or names used in this manual are the exclusive property of that
equipment or software manufacturer. Their usage in this manual is with beneficial intention only.
Company Information
Accom, Inc. Business:(650) 328-3818
1490 O’Brien Drive Fax:(650) 327-2511
Menlo Park, California 94025 WEB: www.accom.com
email: info@accom.com
Safety and First Aid

Accom equipment is designed to the highest standards of quality and reliability. However, no matter
how these systems are designed, operators and maintenance personnel can be exposed to electrical
shock hazard when protective covers are removed for maintenance or the installation of options.
With this caution in mind, each operator and engineer must observe all safety regulations, and have
a clear understanding of first aid procedures related to electrical hazards.
Section 1: Abekas 6000 MultiFlex DTV Server
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
C
This Section contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Expandable Video I/O Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Clip Based Record Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Expandable Local Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Expandable Networked Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Selectable Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
VTR-Style Local Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Louth and Odetics Automation Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
RAID Level 3 Data Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Fibre Channel Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Hot Swappable Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Redundant System Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
System Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
System Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Data / External Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Disk Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Abekas 6000 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Section 2: Control Panel Overview

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Control Panel Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Clip ID Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Timecode / Numeric Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Channel Select / Softkey Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Dialogue Control Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Clip Select Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Timecode Mark / Search Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Clip Operations Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Transport Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Auto Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
E
Contents: Abekas 6000 Operation
Section 3: Status Overlay Menus

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Status Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Menu Familiarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Changing Menu Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Abekas 6000 HOME MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
CHANNEL CONFIG Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
SYSTEM SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
SYSTEM STATUS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
RS422 PORT ASSIGN Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
AUTO EDIT SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
REMOTE TIMING SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
PANEL SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
GPI SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
DIAGNOSTICS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
USER SETUP SAVE/RECALL Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Section 4: Getting Started

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Power Up and Down Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Channel Acquisition and Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Channel Select LED Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Single & Multi-Channel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Acquiring a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Releasing a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Actions to All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Selecting an Acquired Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Grouping Channels / Synchronized Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Placing Channels into a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Selecting the Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Master / Slave Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Changing Slave to Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Transport Control of a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Removing a Channel from a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Removing & Releasing a Channel from a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Placing All Channels into a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Removing All Channels from a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
EE
Removing & Releasing All Channels from a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12 C
Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Video/Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Video+Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Record Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Saving and Recalling User Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Section 5: Clip Recording and Playback

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Clip Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Clip Recording Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Record Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Clip Elements (VKA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Record Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Recording Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Recording to a New Clip ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Recording to the NEXT or PREVIOUS Clip ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Recording into an Existing Clip ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Allocate Recording a New Clip ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Recording Live or Frozen Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Recording a Still . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Recording a Live Input Still Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Recording an Off-Disk Still Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Recording a Video+Key Still Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Points to Know About Recording Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Locking a Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Numeric Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Timecode Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Timecode Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Entering Timecode Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Changing an Entry from Frames to Timecode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Changing an Entry from Field 1 to Field 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Points to Know About Timecode Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Marking Edit Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Setting Edit Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Trimming Edit Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Clearing Edit Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Cueing and Playing Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Cueing Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
EEE
Cueing a Clip using the Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Cueing Clips using the Arrow Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Cueing Clips across the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Playing a Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Using other Transport Functions with a Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Using Variable Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Using GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Loop and Ping-Pong Play Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Ping-Pong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Setting a Loop or Ping-Pong Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Assigning a Play Repeat Mode to a Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Freezing Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Selecting Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Section 6: Clip Management

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Titling Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
QWERTY Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Clip Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Fixing a Mistake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Clip Project Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Clip Owner Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Copying and Moving Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Clip Copy Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Copying a Single Clip ID to Another Clip ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Copying a Range of Clip IDs to a New Clip ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Clip Move Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Moving a Single Clip ID to a New Clip ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Moving a Range of Clip IDs to a New Clip ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Network Clip Copy and Move Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Network Copy Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Network Move Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Copy and Move Special Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Aborting a Copy / Move Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Clearing From, Thru, and To Entry Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Deleting Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Deleting a Single Clip ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Deleting a Range of Clip IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Aborting a Range Delete Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Network Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
EL
Section 7: Applications
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
C
Auto Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Auto Edit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Configuring a VTR for Auto Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Setting up an Auto Edit Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Auto Edit with Abekas 6000 as Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Auto Edit with VTR as Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Points to Know About Auto Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
External Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Automation Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Louth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Odetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Slo-Mo Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Edit Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Points to Know About External Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
GPI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28
GPI Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
GPI Enable On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
GPI IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Channel Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Mode Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
GPI OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Channel Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Mode Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
Time Delay Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Time Delay Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Points to Know About Time Delay Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
List Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42
List Play Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
List Play Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
LIST PLAY EDIT Menu: Individual Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
EDIT Menu Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
List Play Create Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Recalling a Play List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Creating a Play List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Inserting a Clip ID into a Specific Place in the Play List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Inserting a Clip with Marked IN and OUT Points into the Play List . . . . 7-56
Inserting Items at "Item 0" in the Play List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
L
Inserting Items at the END of the Play List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58

Inserting Clip ID Placeholders into a Play List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
List Play EDIT Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
Navigating the Play List in EDIT Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
Transport Control of List Items in EDIT Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
List Play ON-AIR Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Presenting a Play List in ON-AIR Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
Navigating the Play List in ON-AIR Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
Transport Control of List Items in ON-AIR Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
List Play Modify Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Removing Item(s) from a Play List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
Copying Item(s) from a Play List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
Pasting Item(s) into a Play List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
Altering the “Clip ID” in Play List Item(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
Altering the “Air Duration” in Play List Item(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
Altering the "Play/Hold" Advance Flag in Play List Item(s) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
Altering the "Auto/Manual" Advance Flag in Play List Item(s) . . . . . . . . . 7-78
Modifying a Play List in “On-Air” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
List Play File Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Loading a Stored Play List with List Play Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Loading an Empty Play List with List Play Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Loading a Play List with "Short-cut" Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
Saving a Play List with List Play Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
Archiving Contents of a Play List to Tape (or Disk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87
LE
Quick Contents
Section 1:
• Introduction
• Features
Abekas 6000
• System Description MultiFlex DTV Server
• Abekas 6000 Network
Section 1: Abekas 6000
Introduction
This manual is designed for easy reference. Tabbed sections help you
quickly retrieve the information you need.
This manual assumes that you have a properly installed and configured
system, and some basic knowledge of the purpose of a digital video
server in a production or transmission environment. System installation
and configuration instructions are found in the Abekas 6000 Installa-
tion guide.
The following sections are included in this manual:
• Section 1: Abekas 6000 MultiFlex DTV Server — overview of fea-

tures, system description, and applications.
• Section 2: Control Panel Overview — overview of the control
panel layout and button functionality.
• Section 3: Status Overlay Menus — overview of the Status Overlay
structure, menus, and user setup parameters.
• Section 4: Getting Started — discusses everything you need to
know to get started, including: power up/down procedures, channel
configuration and acquiring single and multiple channels for control.
• Section 5: Clip Recording and Playback — discusses all aspects of
clip recording, playback, and timecode entry.
• Section 6: Clip Management — details procedures for titling, copy-
ing, moving, and deleting clips.
• Section 7: Applications — provides detailed information on power-
ful Abekas 6000 applications such as, Auto Edit, Time Delay, List
Play, External Control, and GPI Control.
1-2
Introduction
This Section contains

• Manual Conventions — a few notes to help you understand our
manual formatting.
• Features — a brief explanation of the unique features that make the
Abekas 6000 fast, flexible, and reliable. 1
• System Description — a full listing of all the Abekas 6000’s standard
inputs/outputs and optional features.
• Abekas 6000 Network — a brief description of the functionality
attained when multiple Abekas 6000 servers are networked together.
Manual Conventions
• Control Panel keys are called “buttons” to avoid confusion with
ASCII keyboard keys.
• Names of Control Panel buttons appear in bold letters: the CLIP ID
button, the Play Repeat button, etc.
• Menu names appear in upper case letters: the USER SETUP menu,
the LIST PLAY menu, etc.
• Menu parameters are noted in bold upper and lower case italicized
letters: the TC Threshold, or simply TC Threshold, etc.
• “Select” means to highlight a menu item for use with the rotary knob,
then pressing the TAKE button.
• A sequence of button presses is noted by long dashes (—) separating
the buttons: 1 — : — 2 — 0. Holding one button down and pressing
another appears with a plus (+). For example, holding Shift and
pressing the CLEAR button appears as Shift + CLEAR.
1-3
Features
The Abekas 6000 MultiFlex DTV Server is a feature-rich, broadcast
video server designed to meet the playout and editing needs of the
professional video community. Abekas 6000 standard and optional fea-
tures include:
■ 2, 4, 6, or 8 independent video I/O channels

■ Clip-based record format
■ Up to 127 hours of local online storage
■ Over 4,000 hours of network online storage
■ DVCPRO or DVCPRO-50 compression
■ Fast, accurate, hands-on VTR-style control panel
■ Louth and Odetics protocol support
■ RAID-3 data protection
■ Fibre Channel networking
■ Hot swappable power supplies
■ Redundant System Disks
1-4
Features
Expandable Video I/O Channels

The Abekas 6000 can be configured with 2, 4, 6, or 8 video I/O chan-
nels. Each channel provides a serial digital video input and output and
4 associated digital audio inputs and outputs. You can start out with a
fully expanded system, or add I/O channels as needed.
1
Abekas 6000 video I/O channels are independent from one another. In
a fully expanded system, up to eight VTRs, cameras, or video feeds can
be digitizing to disk simultaneously. Or, some channels might be play-
ing back material while others are recording. Each channel can be
independently controlled by station automation using Louth or Odetics
protocol.
The modular architecture of the Abekas 6000 provides a large measure

of future-proofing by eliminating dependencies between video I/O for-
mats, networking solutions, and the ultra-high bandwidth disk storage
system. Video I/O and network connections can be upgraded in the
future without affecting media storage hardware.
Clip Based Record Format

TruClipTM, the Abekas 6000 directory format, assigns each piece of
recorded material a unique 1-to-7 digit identifier, greatly simplifying
recall to air, especially when manual recall is employed. I/O channels
can be easily and immediately paired for Video+Key record or playout
so that a single identifier recalls both elements to the proper output
channels. The unique clip identifier also makes exchanging material
between networked systems simple and accurate.
Expandable Local Storage

The Abekas 6000 base chassis provides up to 42.5 hours of media stor-
age capacity. Add up to two storage expansion chassis to expand the
Abekas 6000 local storage capacity up to 127 hours. Local storage pro-
vides real time record and playback of multiple media streams.
Expandable Networked Storage

Up to 32 Abekas 6000 servers can be networked together to provide
total networked media storage capacity in excess of 4,000 hours. The
Fibre Channel interconnect provides faster-than-realtime file transfer
1-5
speeds and does not impact normal video and audio I/O on servers
involved in the transfer.
Selectable Compression
On a clip-by-clip basis, choose DVCPRO (4:1:1) compression at
25Mb/s, or for greater image accuracy, DVCPRO-50 (4:2:2) compres-
sion at 50Mb/s.
VTR-Style Local Control

The Abekas 6000 control panel provides fast, frame-accurate tape-to-
server editing using VTR-style controls you will understand at a glance.
When used for news edit or news play-to-air, control panel ease-of-use
and tactile feedback instill and justify operator confidence. The Abekas
6000 control panel eliminates the cumbersome computer GUI, menus,
and mouse-clicks that frustrate operators of other servers.
Louth and Odetics Automation Compatibility

Station automation systems that employ either Louth or Odetics proto-
cols can control the Abekas 6000 directly. Extensive control flexibility
even allows each I/O channel of the Abekas 6000 to be independently
controlled.
RAID Level 3 Data Protection

As an option, Abekas 6000 disk arrays may use RAID Level 3. Data is
interleaved at byte-level across multiple hard drives to provide
extremely fast, parallel transfer of large blocks of data—ideal for video
and graphics intensive applications. An additional drive or drives are
used to store parity information so that if a media drive were to fail, the
1-6
Features
missing data would be restored on-the-fly using parity data and the
remaining file data from the other hard drives. The failed disk drive
may then be shut down, removed from the array, and then replaced
with a new disk drive—all while the server continues to operate nor-
mally. The parity information is then automatically rebuilt onto the new
disk drive as a background task. 1
Fibre Channel Networking

Fibre Channel has become the defacto networking standard for video
applications because of its near universal support among equipment
manufacturers, comparatively simple and inexpensive installation, and
fast file transfer speeds. Fibre Channel answers both control and faster-
than-realtime file transfer demands through a single interface. The Abe-
kas 6000 system supports up to 32 servers in a fibre channel network
configuration.
Hot Swappable Power Supplies

The Abekas 6000 is designed to meet the rigorous demands of the 24-
hour broadcast environment. Optional redundant power supplies
ensure that a single supply failure won’t interrupt your operation. Hot
swappability means that you can replace a failed power supply without
having to power down or interrupt record and playback operation.
Redundant System Disks

A data mirroring option is available which provides complete, redun-
dant file storage for ultimate file protection. All system files that reside
on the main system hard disk drive are automatically copied to the
optional backup system hard disk drive (mirror). Any time a file is writ-
ten or deleted on the main system hard disk drive, the action is auto-
matically “mirrored” on the backup hard disk drive. In this way, if there
is a main system disk failure, the Abekas 6000 operation switches to
the backup hard disk until the system can be taken down to replace
the failed drive.
If either of the system hard disk drives (A or B) fail, their respective sta-
tus LEDs will turn red and an alarm will sound once every minute until
the ALARM SILENT button is pressed or the system can be powered
down to replace the failed drive.
1-7
System Description
Following is a description of the rear panel input/output connections,
disk storage and system options available with the Abekas 6000 system.
Refer to the Abekas 6000 Installation guide for details on all chassis
connectors.
System Inputs
Video
• (2) SDI (Serial Digital Video) inputs
Each encode/decode card includes two video I/O channels with one
SDI input for each video channel. VITC readers are also included. Up
to 4 encode/decode cards (8 video channel inputs/outputs) can be
fitted into the main chassis.
•SDI: SMPTE 259M in 525 line standard.
•SDI: EBU-Tech.3267-E in 625 line standard.
Audio
• (4) AES/EBU digital audio inputs (stereo pairs)
Each audio card provides eight tracks (four stereo pairs in total) of
digital audio inputs/outputs. The audio is sampled at 48kHz with up
to 24-bit resolution, and conforms to AES-EBU specification. Each
card can provide 4-track digital audio for two video channels (or up
to four video channels can be configured with 8 audio tracks each).
A maximum of four audio cards can be fitted into the Abekas 6000
main server chassis. XLR or BNC connectors are available on the con-
nector breakout panel, as specified at time of purchase.
Reference
• (1) Composite analog black burst (NTSC/PAL) with loop through
The black burst input includes a VITC reader for system “time of
Day” timecode reference.
LTC
• (1) Analog LTC
Used for “time of day” timecode input, as an alternative to the “time
of day” VITC on the Reference video input.
1-8
System Description
System Outputs
Video
• (2) SDI (Serial Digital Video) outputs
Each encode/decode card includes two video I/O channels with one
SDI output for each video channel (includes VITC generators). Up to 1
4 encode/decode cards (8 video channel inputs/outputs) can be fit-
ted into the main chassis.
•SDI: SMPTE 259M in 525 line standard.
•SDI: EBU-Tech.3267-E in 625 line standard.
• (2) Composite analog video outputs
Each encode/decode card includes two video channels with a pair of
composite analog video outputs for each video channel. Both out-
puts are used for monitoring.
• (2) Composite analog video outputs with Status Overlay

Each encode/decode card includes two video channels with a Status
Overlay output for each video I/O channel. These Status Overlay
outputs are located on the rear panel of the main chassis and provide
a second composite video output and the Status Menu Overlay dis-
play (which forms a primary part of the user interface to the Abekas
6000). A break-out cable is supplied for each of the two Status Over-
lay connectors. When the status menu overlay is turned off, this out-
put is a standard composite video output  for preview purposes
only.
Audio
• (4) AES/EBU digital audio outputs (stereo pairs)
Each audio card provides eight tracks (four stereo pairs in total) of
digital audio inputs/outputs. The audio is sampled at 48kHz with up
to 24-bit resolution, and conforms to AES-EBU specification. Each
card can provide 4-track digital audio for two video channels (or up
to four video channels can be configured with 8 audio tracks each).
A maximum of eight audio cards can be fitted into the Abekas 6000
main server chassis (with only two video cards/4 channels). XLR or
BNC connectors are available on the connector breakout panel, as
specified at time of purchase.
• (8) Analog audio outputs (balanced)
The analog audio outputs are used for monitoring, with 4 audio
tracks per video channel (8 outputs per single audio card). High
quality output is provided by oversampled 16-bit digital to analog
converters.
1-9
Data / External Control
External Control
• (13) RS422 Serial Control Ports
Sony, Louth, Odetics, and Abekas 6000 CP protocols are supported.
Up to eight control panels can be connected to a single Abekas 6000
server. Each video channel (up to eight) can be assigned as a “slave”
device to an external editing or automation system. Up to six of the
eight video channels can have “master” control over external VTRs
for frame accurate loading and unloading of video, key and audio
material.
•Ports 1-8 allow control by an Abekas 6000 control panel
•Ports 1-8 allow the Abekas 6000 (slave) to be controlled by an
external editing system (master). Sony, Louth, and Odetics
protocols are supported.
•Ports 7-12 allow the Abekas 6000 (master) to control an external
VTR (slave). Sony protocol is supported.
•Port 13 is a dedicated Abekas 6000 Control Panel port
• (16) GPI input triggers
GPI inputs allow external devices to trigger specific control panel
functions. Please refer to “GPI Operations” for more information on
setting up GPI input triggers.
• (12) GPI output triggers
GPI outputs are used to trigger external devices, and are activated
using functions in the Abekas 6000 Control Panel. Please refer to
“GPI Operations” for more information on setting up GPI output trig-
gers.
• (1) Ethernet 10T and 100T
Ethernet communications protocol sends control data between Abe-
kas 6000 servers and provides the ability to maintain a network-wide
Clip ID database to ensure that Clip IDs can be located across the
Abekas 6000 network and that duplicate Clip IDs are not created on
networked Abekas 6000 servers.
1-10
System Description
Data
• (1) VGA Display
Used for diagnostic purposes
• (1) QWERTY Keyboard
Used for diagnostic purposes 1
• (1) Disk Expansion Chassis Control Interface
Sends control signals from the main chassis to the disk expansion
chassis, and reads status information from the disk expansion chassis
to the main chassis.
• (4) Disk Expansion Chassis Ultra-2 LVD SCSI Interface
Used to transfer video, key and audio data between the main chassis
and disk expansion chassis.
Disk Storage
The Abekas 6000 provides compressed digital video and uncom-
pressed digital audio storage either on a RAID-0 or RAID-3 parity pro-
tected disk array. Disk storage is 8-bits, 4:1:1 sampled at DVCPRO
(25Mb/s) or 4:2:2 sampled at DVCPRO-50 (50Mb/s).
A minimum number of disk drives are required to support a given
number of video channels in all Abekas 6000 server chassis’, as shown
by the dot (!) in the charts below. For example, when using 18GB disk
drives, the main server chassis with 8 video channels must have at least
12 disks (six dual-disk options) in order to operate properly. Storage
times are shown at the 25Mb/s bit rate—if all recordings are made at
50Mb/s, the storage times shown in the chart will be reduced by half.
Storage times are for the 625 line standard. Storage times in 525 are
slightly longer.
Read these tables downward, following the “Video Channels Fitted”
columns. Only those configurations marked with a dot (!) can be
ordered. For example, a 6 or 8 channel server cannot be ordered with
7.0 hours of storage.
1-11
Storage in Main Server Chassis

# Disk Option Kits Total Storage Time *
# Video Channels Fitted in Server
(2 disks in each Kit) (Hours)
Primary Parity 2 4 6 8 18GB Disks 36GB Disks 50GB Disks
4 1 ! ! 07.0 Hrs. 14.0 Hrs. 19.3 Hrs.
5 1 ! ! ! 09.8 Hrs. 19.6 Hrs. 27.0 Hrs.
6 1 ! ! ! ! 12.6 Hrs. 25.2 Hrs. 34.7 Hrs.
7 1 ! ! ! ! 15.4 Hrs. 30.8 Hrs. 42.5 Hrs.
With Disk Expansion Chassis 1
11 2 ! ! 22.4 Hrs. 44.8 Hrs. 61.8 Hrs.
12 2 ! ! ! 25.2 Hrs. 50.4 Hrs. 69.5 Hrs.
13 2 ! ! ! ! 28.0 Hrs. 56.0 Hrs. 77.2 Hrs.
14 2 ! ! ! ! 30.8 Hrs. 61.6 Hrs. 84.9 Hrs.
With Disk Expansion Chassis 1 & 2
18 3 ! ! 37.8 Hrs. 75.6 Hrs. 104.2 Hrs.
19 3 ! ! ! 40.6 Hrs. 81.2 Hrs. 111.9 Hrs.
20 3 ! ! ! ! 43.4 Hrs. 86.8 Hrs. 119.5 Hrs.
21 3 ! ! ! ! 46.2 Hrs. 92.4 Hrs. 127.4 Hrs.
• The Abekas 6000 Main Server chassis can house a maximum of (16)
disk drives (including parity drives). Keep in mind that each disk
upgrade kit includes two disk drives. Each Parity upgrade kit
includes two disk drives.
• The Disk Expansion chassis can each house a maximum of (16) disk
drives (including parity drives). Up to two Disk Expansion chassis
may be connected to the Abekas 6000 Main Server chassis.
• Any server system can support either 18GB, 36GB, or 50GB disk
drives, but drive sizes cannot be mixed in the same server chassis.
• When the Parity Option is not ordered, the maximum number of
disks in a chassis is (14) disk drives (7 disk kits).
• When the Parity Option is ordered, two disk drives are included with
the parity kit, but these disks do not increase storage time of an exist-
ing set of disk drives.
• If the Parity Option is ordered for the Abekas 6000 main server chas-
sis, then the Parity Option must also be ordered for any Disk Expan-
sion chassis' that are to be connected to this main server chassis.
1-12
System Description
System Options
• Additional Audio/Video I/O channels — maximum of 8 total video
channels per chassis (4 encode/decode cards with 2-video channels
each). Each video card receives two serial digital (SDI) component
video signals for recording into the Abekas 6000, and provides two
serial digital component video output signals for playout. Also pro- 1
vided are four composite analog video outputs (two per digital video
channel). Each video I/O channel includes 4-track digital audio I/O.
• Additional Disk Drives — increase local video storage in the main
server chassis from 7.0 hours up to 42.5 hours (at 25Mb/s).
• Disk Expansion Chassis — increase local video storage from 42.5
hours up to 127 hours, maximum. Each Disk Expansion chassis con-
tains additional RAID-0 or RAID-3 disk drive storage, with optional
hot-swappable disk drives, ultra-reliable and highly redundant fan
assemblies, and a power supply module with space for an optional
redundant hot-swap power supply.
• Hot-Swap redundant Power Supply Module — for the main Abekas
6000 chassis or Disk Expansion chassis. Fitting this redundant power
supply provides uninterrupted operation during a single power sup-
ply failure, ensuring your server remains on the air. A replacement
power supply can be fitted even while the server is operating.
• Redundant Mirror System Disk — provides protection from failure of
the primary system disk. The system disk stores the operating sys-
tem, clip ID database, user and engineering setup parameters.
Because the system disks are not hot-swappable, you will need to
take the server down at a maintenance interval to replace a failed
system disk drive. The system disks are located at the front of the
main server chassis, and are easily replaced by loosening just two
thumb screws.
• Fibre Channel — server networking, transport control and file trans-
port. This optional card provides two Fibre Channel ports (transmit
and receive), which support machine control protocol, along with
video, key, audio and meta data file transfer. The use of these ports
allows media to be transferred at rates faster than real time when
moving or copying clips into or out of the Abekas 6000 server. One
Fibre Channel card can be fitted into the main chassis.
• Additional Hardware Control Panels — up to seven Control Panels
can be added (for a total of eight) for stand-alone operation, machine
setup, and VTR-to-Server editing. Additional operators working off
the same server can simultaneously edit news packages, play seg-
ments and graphics to air, produce live events highlights and provide
slo-motion playback.
1-13
Abekas 6000 Network

An individual Abekas 6000 server is referred to as a “node”. Connecting
server nodes together via Ethernet and Fibre Channel creates an Abe-
kas 6000 Network. You can interconnect as few as 2 or as many as 32
Abekas 6000 servers.
2
1
Fibre Channel
Arbitrated Loop Hub Box
32
When servers are connected via Ethernet, the TruClipTM clip-based

nature of the Abekas 6000 ensures that duplicate clip IDs are not cre-
ated anywhere on the network (which means the chance of recalling
an incorrect clip ID is practically eliminated). Ethernet connectivity also
provides the ability to delete clips on remote Abekas 6000 servers and
copy clips between networked servers.
With the Fibre Channel option, media clips stored on any server in the
network can be moved or copied faster than real time for playback on
any other server.
1-14
Quick Contents
Section 2:
• Overview
• Control Panel Navigation
Control Panel Overview
Overview
This section is an overview of the Abekas 6000 Control Panel layout.
The Control Panel layout has a familiar VTR-like look and feel and is
broken into functional displays and subpanels for ease of operation.
This section will help you navigate through all the Control Panel but-
tons and displays and quickly familiarize yourself with their function
and operation.
The topic covered in this section:
• Control Panel Navigation
2-2
Control Panel Navigation

The Abekas 6000 Control Panel is illustrated below. The buttons on the
Clip ID Timecode Clip TC Ext.VITC

Ch
MOVE CLIP From: 5400 Thru: 5415 Network
To: 2700 Packing? NO

Hours Minutes Seconds Frames Output Mode
System Diagnostics RS422 Remote
AUTO EDIT
M U LT I F L E X DTV SERVER
6000 DDR DDR
VTR VTR
2
Ch A Ch B CLIP PLAY MODIFY TITLE MOVE DELETE COPY LIST PLAY Preview Review Enable Recorder Panel Play Repeat
F1 F6
Ch C Ch D 7 8 9 BACKSPACE
F2 F7 Exit From Thru V K A1 A2 A3 A4 Shuttle
Ch E Ch F CLIP ID 4 5 6 + JOG REC JOG
F3 F8 Shift To Yes / No Jog
Bypass Freeze
Ch G Ch H 1 2 3 -
Clip ID Locked
F4 F9 Menu Insert Var Play
REW PLAY STOP PLAY FF
Group All Ch MARK IN MARK OUT GO TO 0 00 FRM / TC ENTER TAKE
F5 F10
Control Panel are grouped by functionality. Some of the buttons are

color coded to help you connect the button with its function. Visual
and physical grouping helps when you are pressing buttons under the
pressures of a broadcast production environment.
Many of the buttons have associated LEDs to indicate the status of their
function. All of these button details will be described later on in this
section.
Functional “displays” and “subpanels” described in this section include:

• Clip ID Display
• LCD Display
• Timecode / Numeric Display
• Channel Select / Softkey Subpanel
• Dialogue Control Subpanel
• Clip Select Subpanel
• Timecode Mark / Search Subpanel
• Clip Operations Subpanel
• Numeric Keypad
• Transport Control Subpanel
• Auto Edit Subpanel
2-3
Clip ID Display
Look here to quickly verify which channel and clip are currently
selected.
Clip ID
Ch
System Diagnostics
• Ch — displays the currently selected channel (A-H).

• Clip ID — displays the Clip ID number (1-7 digits) of the currently
loaded clip in the selected channel.
• System Diagnostics — a tri-colored LED that indicates the status of
the server sub-assemblies. The System Diagnostics LED has the fol-
lowing states:
Steady Green indicates proper operation of all sub-assemblies. No
diagnostic message appears in the LCD display.
Blinking Yellow indicates there has been a failure within one of the
redundant sub-assemblies, but the machine will continue to operate
properly for an indefinite period of time until repair action can be
taken. No diagnostic message appears in the LCD display. The LED
briefly blinks OFF once every two seconds, just to draw attention.
Flashing Red indicates two or more items within one of the redun-
dant sub-assemblies has failed, or a single item within two or more
of the sub-assemblies has failed. The main chassis is about to have a
catastrophic failure, and may be automatically shut down within a
short amount of time. A warning message appears in the LCD display
on the Abekas 6000 Control Panel once every five to fifteen seconds
(depending upon the problem), for a duration of one second in each
appearance. This warning message indicates which sub assembly has
failed. The System Diagnostics LED flashes ON and OFF twice every
second, to more urgently draw attention.
Steady Red indicates an entire sub assembly has failed or was auto-
matically shut down. The Abekas 6000 server is now not operational.
A permanent warning message appears in the LCD display that indi-
cates which sub assembly has failed.
In addition to the System Diagnostics LED on the Abekas 6000 Con-
trol Panel, the status of these sub-assemblies is also reported on the
front of the Abekas 6000 Main Chassis in the form of four tri-colored
LEDs.
2-4
LCD Display
The LCD display shows information related to the function you are per-
forming at the time. It will also display warning messages. For exam-
ple, the message, “Ch-A has no key” will appear if you try to enable the
key track and ChA is not configured for key record and playback.
(Clip Untitled)
ChA has no Key V-A 2
In Clip Play mode, the current clip “title” and tracks (VKA) recorded
with the clip are displayed. Other operation-specific information and
dialogue is displayed when performing clip operations such as:
TITLE
Hurricane Charlie
COPY
COPY CLIP From: 100 Thru: 110

To: 1000 Packing? NO
DELETE
Del DONE:OK From: 100 Thru:

1 clip deleted
AUTO EDIT
RecDDR In= 00.00.00.00 Out= 00.00.05.00

SrcVTR In= 01.10.12.00 Out= 01.10.17.00
2-5
Timecode / Numeric Display

All Clip ID numbers and timecode entries are displayed here as they
are entered. When a clip is under transport control its timecode posi-
tion is displayed. System status information such as Output Mode, and
Network and RS422 Remote enables are also displayed.
Timecode Clip TC Ext.VITC
Network

RS422 Remote
• Network — enables the Ethernet and Fibre Channel network con-

nection. When enabled, the button LED lights up. Clips can be cop-
ied over the Ethernet connection if the Fibre Channel option is not
installed. Clip delete commands are also sent to other Abekas 6000
nodes via the Ethernet connection. With the Fibre Channel option
installed, clips can be moved and copied to or from other Abekas
6000 servers (up to 32) on the network (at speeds faster-than-real-
time).
• RS422 Remote — enables the currently active channel (ChA - ChH)
for remote control (as a slave) from an external remote controller or
VTR.
• Timecode — displays the current clip timecode position and all
numeric entries.
• Output Mode — displays the output mode (frame, field 1 or field 2)
for the current clip.
• Clip TC — is lit green to indicate Clip Timecode is is being dis-
played. Clip timecode is recorded with every clip and starts at
00.00.00.00.
• Ext.VITC — is lit red when External VITC Timecode is chosen for
display. The Ext. VITC signal comes from the selected video chan-
nel’s input video signal. If an Ext. VITC signal is coming in, it will get
recorded with each new clip. This feature is not currently imple-
mented.
2-6
Channel Select / Softkey Subpanel

The following figure illustrates the Channel Select/Softkey area of the
control panel.
Ch A Ch B
F1 F6
2
Ch C Ch D
F2 F7 Exit
Ch E Ch F
F3 F8 Shift
Ch G Ch H
F4 F9 Menu
GROUP ALL Ch
F5 F10
• Ch A thru Ch H — buttons acquire, select, and release any of the 8

video I/O channels. The color of the LED indicates channel status.
• F1 thru F10 — are “softkeys” (multifunction buttons that initiate dif-
ferent actions depending upon which menu is active). The menu dis-
play found on the “status” composite video output shows the softkey
function of a button while that menu is active. Softkeys are primarily
used for operational functions such as List Play editing.
• Group — Used to assign channels for “grouped” synchronized con-
trol. Also used to select a group for control. The color of the LED
indicates channel status.
• All Ch — Used to act upon all available channels. For example,
when acquiring channels, press Shift + All Ch to acquire all chan-
nels that are available to be acquired.
• Exit — Used to exit a sub-menu—as seen on the “status” composite
video output. Press Exit twice to return to the main menu. The Exit
button is also used to release channels (ChA - ChH) from control
panel acquisition. Press and hold Exit and then press any one of the
Ch A through Ch H buttons to release the given channel.
2-7
• Shift — Some menu actions and control panel buttons are dual func-
tion, pressing Shift accesses this second function. The Shift button is
also used to acquire channels for use. Press and hold Shift and then
press any one of the Ch A through Ch H buttons to acquire the
given channel (assuming the channel is free to acquire).
• Menu — Used to toggle the status overlay between full display, par-
tial display, and off states. The Menu button LED lights when the
menu is displayed over the composite video output.
Partial Full None
Abekas 6000 HOME MENU (1/10)

>CHANNEL CONFIG
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
RS422 PORT ASSIGN
AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
USER SETUP SAVE/RECALL
ChA Server-171 ChA Server-171

Clip:0000200 00:00:00:00 F1-2 Clip:0000200 00:00:00:00 F1-2
STOP 0.00 STOP 0.00
POWER POWER POWER
SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP

TV VOLUME CHANNEL STEREO TV VOLUME CHANNEL STEREO TV VOLUME CHANNEL STEREO
VIDEO TIMER VIDEO TIMER VIDEO TIMER
Dialogue Control Subpanel

This area of the Control Panel is used for dialogue pertaining to MOD-
IFY, MOVE, DELETE and COPY clip operations. The Insert button is
used to insert clips into the current list for playout.
From Thru
To Yes / No
Insert
• From — sets the “from” Clip ID number when specifying the begin-
ning of a range of clips to be moved, deleted or copied.
• Thru — sets the “thru” Clip ID number when specifying the end of a
range of clips to be moved, deleted or copied.
• To — sets the “to” Clip ID number when specifying where the speci-
fied range of clips will be moved, or copied “to”.
2-8
• Yes / No — Used to answer dialogue when performing move, delete

or copy operations.
• Insert — inserts the current clip, or the clip ID number entered via
the numeric keypad, into the currently loaded play list.
Clip Select Subpanel

Use these buttons to quickly cue recorded clips and to create new
clips. 2
CLIP ID
• CLIP ID — Used to create new Clip IDs and cue previously recorded
clips into the active video channel.
• ! — In Clip Play mode, finds the next recorded Clip ID and loads it
into the active video channel. When used with the REC button, will
record to the next higher open clip ID.
In List Play mode, highlights the previous list item and cues that clip
into the active video channel.
• " — In Clip Play mode, finds the previously recorded Clip ID and
loads it into the active video channel. When used with the REC but-
ton, will record to the next lower open clip ID.
In List Play mode, highlights the next list item and cues that clip into
the active video channel.
2-9
Timecode Mark / Search Subpanel

These three buttons are used for marking clip segments for playback,
modification or editing, and searching to specific timecode locations
within a clip. The illustration below provides a side-view of the MARK
IN button’s secondary “shifted” functions.
MARK IN MARK OUT GO TO
SLIDE
• MARK IN — marks the timecode IN point for loop and ping-pong

play (Clip and List Play modes). With Auto Edit enabled, you can
mark IN points on the DDR and VTR for edit events. You can also
mark an IN point to define a clip segment for mosdification.
SLIDE — allows you to slide source or record IN and OUT times
simultaneously (maintaining the same duration) when working in
Auto Edit mode. Slides can either be absolute (similar to a “set”), or
relative (similar to a “trim”). Enter an absolute timecode or a trim
value, and press Shift + SLIDE.
• MARK OUT — marks the timecode OUT point for loop and ping-
pong play (Clip and List Play modes). With Auto Edit enabled, you
can mark OUT points on the DDR and VTR for edit events. You can
also mark an OUT point to define a clip segment for modification.
• GOTO — Used to seek to a selected timecode or mark point. Press
GOTO to perform an immediate disk seek to a timecode or frame
value entered on the numeric keypad. Alternately, press GOTO, fol-
lowed by MARK IN or MARK OUT to immediately seek to the
marked IN or OUT timecode value.
2-10
Clip Operations Subpanel

The Clip Operations “subpanel” is illustrated below. You can switch
between CLIP PLAY and LIST PLAY modes and also modify, title and
manage clips on the local and networked Abekas 6000 servers. The
illustration below provides a side-view of each button’s secondary
“shifted” function.
6000 MULTIFLEX DTV SERVER

2
CLIP PLAY MODIFY TITLE MOVE DELETE COPY LIST PLAY
BROWSE ATTRIBUTES FIND LIST LIST LIST ON-AIR
• CLIP PLAY — Places the Abekas 6000 in Clip Play mode - the default
system mode from which most Abekas 6000 functions are performed.
The entire disk area is available for playback and record. Clip Play
mode must be selected in order to record. In this mode, clips are
recorded, played and modified one at a time.
Pressing CLIP PLAY will not cancel any clip operation in progress
(Title, Move, Delete, etc.). The LCD display will return to showing
the current clip’s title and track usage information (VKA).
BROWSE — (Not Implemented Yet)
• MODIFY — (Not Implemented Yet)

ATTRIBUTES — (Not Implemented Yet)
• TITLE — uses an ASCII keyboard connected to the Abekas 6000

Control Panel to change the Clip ID Title, Project Name, and Owner
Name. Each clip can have its own title (up to 80 characters) and
Project Name (up to 20 characters). The titling function helps you
quickly identify clips and keep projects organized.
FIND — (Not Implemented Yet)
• MOVE — If the CLIP PLAY mode is active, the Move function is used
to move either a single Clip ID or range of Clip IDs from an old loca-
tion to a new location.
LIST — (Not Implemented Yet)
2-11
• DELETE — If the CLIP PLAY mode is active, the Delete operation is

used to remove either a single Clip ID or range of Clip IDs from the
Abekas 6000.
• COPY — If the CLIP PLAY mode is active, the Copy function is used
to copy either a single “Clip ID” or range of “Clip IDs” from an old
location to a new location.
• LIST PLAY — Places the Abekas 6000 in List Play mode and displays
the List Play “on screen” menu on the status monitor. List Play mode
restricts disk playback to material that has been defined in a clip Play
List (as defined in the List Play Menu). Because the Abekas 6000
server is a random access device, clip arrangement may be random
or sequential (in effect providing an internal cuts-only editor). The
Play List itself is given a List ID that is referenced when storing and
recalling lists. List editing functions are also provided in the menu
display and are accessed via the function keys (F1 - F10). The LCD
display on the control panel is also used to show the clip title of the
current item in the play list.
ON-AIR — (Not Implemented Yet)
2-12
Numeric Keypad
The numeric keypad includes the Clear, Trim, and +/- buttons, and the
numeric, colon, and decimal buttons. As values are typed, they appear
in the control panel numeric display. The illustration below provides
side-views of the Numeric Keypad buttons with secondary “shifted”
functions.
7 8 9 BACKSPACE CLEAR
2
4 5 6 + f1/f2
1 2 3 - UNDO
0 00 FRM / TC ENTER
• BACKSPACE — Clears the last number entered. Press and hold or

press repeatedly to clear entire entries.
CLEAR — Used to clear edit points, marks, text, and values. Press
Shift + CLEAR to remove an entire entry from the numeric display.
To clear other numeric or text values, the numeric display must be
empty. Then pressing Shift + CLEAR causes the word “CLEAR” to
appear in the numeric display. At this point, pressing a destination
button, such as TITLE, From, Thru, To, MARK IN or MARK OUT,
clears that value.
• + — Sets the sign of a numeric entry to positive when trimming an

existing MARK IN, MARK OUT or GOTO value. For example, if the
current MARK IN value was 1.00, you could trim it to 1.15 by press-
ing “+”, then the 1 and 5 keys, followed by the MARK IN button.
f1/f2 — Press Shift + f1/f2 (field 1/field 2) to toggle keypad entries
between field 1 and field 2 notation. Commas or periods between
digits indicate field 1 (for example, 12,21,03,11 or 4.05.14.04). Semi-
colons or colons indicate field 2 (for example, 2;14;35;05 or
1:02:21:00).
2-13
• - — Sets the sign of a numeric entry to negative when trimming an

existing MARK IN, MARK OUT or GOTO value. For example, if the
current MARK IN value was 1.00, you could trim it to 0.85 by press-
ing “-” (to set a negative value), then the 1 and 5 keys, followed by
the MARK IN button.
UNDO — is a toggle. Press Shift + UNDO once to undo a numeric
entry. Press again to restore the results of the previous entry.
• ENTER — Used as the final step or confirmation when performing

clip operations such as TITLE, MOVE, DELETE and COPY, or enter-
ing Clip IDs.
• 0 - 9 — Numeric buttons used to enter Clip IDs, List IDs, timecode
and frame numbers.
• 00 — types a double 0 (zero) when entering timecode, frames, and
trims. For example, press 1 — 00 — 00 — 00 to enter a timecode
value of 1.00.00.00 (one hour). For numeric entry, note that the
default TC Threshold of 100 frames is still obeyed. During a
numeric entry sequence, when the threshold is crossed, the entry
automatically converts from frames to timecode.
• FRM/TC — The FRM/TC (Frames/Timecode) button toggles a key-
pad entry between absolute frames notation and timecode notation.
For example, to enter a value of 600 frames, press 6 — 0 — 0 —
FRM/TC. For numeric entry, note that the default TC Threshold of
100 frames is still obeyed. Values equal to or greater than the thresh-
old are shown as timecode. Values less than the threshold are shown
as frames. See Section 5: Timecode Threshold for information on
changing the TC Threshold value.
. — Pressing Shift +. enters a decimal point when entering Var Play
or menu parameter values. For example, to enter a Var Play speed of
20.5%, press 2 — 0 — Shift +. — 5 — Var Play.
2-14
Transport Control
The transport controls are illustrated below.
AUTO EDIT
DDR DDR
VTR VTR
Preview Review Enable Recorder Panel Play Repeat
V K A1 A2 A3 A4 Shuttle
2
JOG REC JOG
Jog
Bypass Freeze
Clip ID Locked
Var Play
REW PLAY STOP PLAY FF
TAKE
DDR DDR/VTR Panel — Used in conjunction with the Auto Edit func-
VTR
Panel
tion. Active only when Auto Edit is enabled. Determines whether
the Abekas 6000 control panel is controlling the Abekas 6000 (DDR)
or a VTR connected to one of the RS422 ports on the Abekas 6000
main chassis.
Hint: With Auto Edit enabled you can toggle the DDR/VTR Panel button to alter-
nately set the Auto Edit IN and OUT points for both the recorder and the player device.
Once some or all of the criteria are set for an Auto Edit event, you may choose to tem-
porarily turn OFF the Auto Edit function while preserving the data entered thus far.
Play Repeat — Used to toggle Play Repeat between OFF, Loop, or

Ping-Pong (default is OFF). The button LED flashes to indicate that
the play repeat mode is active. The loop symbol lights when Loop
Play Repeat
mode is selected. The ping-pong symbol lights when Ping-Pong

mode is selected. See Section 5: Loop and Ping-Pong Play for more
information on loop and ping-pong playback.
When a clip is recorded, the current Play Repeat mode is saved with
the clip. When that clip is recalled its Play Repeat mode will be
turned on. A Play Repeat mode can be assigned or removed from an
existing clip by first selecting the desired Play Repeat mode, press-
ing and holding REC, then the Play Repeat button.
2-15
V — Enables or disables the video track for recording, used for both
V clip and Auto Edit records. When enabled (LED on), the video track
is recorded.
K — Enables or disables the key track for recording (a pair of chan-

K nels must be configured for Video+Key). Used for both standard clip
recording and Auto Edit recording. When enabled (LED on), a key
track is recorded with the clip.
A1, A2, A3 and A4 — Enable or disable the given audio tracks for
A1 A2 A3 A4 recording, used for both clip and Auto Edit records. When enabled
(LED on), the associated audio track is recorded.
Bypass — Enables or disables the Bypass function, also known as

Bypass “EE” (electronics to electronics). When turned ON, input video, key
and audio passes directly from the video and audio inputs to the
output of the Abekas 6000 for quick monitoring of input signals.
When bypass is turned OFF, off-disk video, key and audio material
is seen and heard on the output of the Abekas 6000.
Freeze — Enables or disables the Freeze function. When turned

Freeze ON, output video and key is frozen, regardless of the current menu
or output mode. The current state of the Bypass mode will deter-
mine which source is frozen: if Bypass is ON, input video is frozen;
if Bypass is OFF, off-disk video is frozen. Still frames (from live-
input or off-disk video) captured with the Freeze button can be
recorded as separate, single frame clips.
If the disk is playing when Freeze is turned ON, the output video
will freeze, but disk movement continues. When freeze is turned
OFF, live video and key are seen at the output of the Abekas 6000.
When enabled, Freeze remains active during any transport com-
mand used to move the disk. This allows you to freeze an image,
move the disk to a new location, and re-record the frozen image
elsewhere.
PLAY Play Reverse — Plays the disk backward from the current position.
If the # PLAY button is pressed while the Var Play function is ON,
reverse play speed is determined by the value of the last entered Var
Play speed value (from -3.000 to +3.000 times normal play speed).
While the disk is playing, the button LED is lighted. All other trans-
port buttons (except for REC and AUTO EDIT) are canceled when
# PLAY is pressed. Record and Auto Edit functions can be canceled
only by pressing the STOP button.
2-16
PLAY Play Forward — Plays the disk forward from the current position.
If the PLAY $ button is pressed while the Var Play function is ON,
forward play speed is determined by the value of the last entered
Var Play speed value (from -3.000 to +3.000 times normal play
speed). While the disk is playing, the button LED is lighted. All other
transport buttons (except for REC and AUTO EDIT) are canceled
when PLAY $ is pressed. Record and Auto Edit functions can be
canceled only by pressing the STOP button.
REC Record — Used in several ways: 2

■ In conjunction with the numeric keypad, Record is used to set a
duration for the next record operation. Set duration by first typing
the desired duration at the numeric keypad, then pressing REC.
■ In conjunction with the PLAY $ button, Record is used to initiate
a record operation. Press and hold REC, then press PLAY $ to
begin recording (for the currently set duration). When Record is
held down by itself, the button LED lights and the currently set
record duration is displayed. While the Abekas 6000 is recording,
the Record button LED is lighted.
■ In conjunction with the SHIFT button, Record is used to toggle
the “Clip ID Locked” flag on the currently cued clip. Press SHIFT
+ REC to toggle the state of the Clip ID Locked flag.
■ In conjunction with the Play Repeat button, Record is used to
modify the state of the play repeat flag that’s stored in the
currently cued clip. Press and hold REC, then press the Play
Repeat button to modify the current setting of the play repeat
flag in the current clip.
While recording, all transport buttons except AUTO EDIT are can-
celed. Record and Auto Edit functions can be canceled only by
pressing the STOP button.
REW Rewind — Plays the disk backward from the current disk position
at 60 times normal play speed. While the disk is rewinding, the but-
ton LED is lighted. All other transport buttons are OFF during
rewind operation. When the disk reaches the start of the clip in Clip
Play mode (or the start of the list in List Play mode), the rewind
operation is stopped. All transport buttons (except for REC and
AUTO EDIT) are canceled during rewind. Record and Auto Edit
functions can be canceled only by pressing the STOP button.
2-17
FF Fast Forward — Plays the disk from the current disk position at 60
times normal play speed. The button LED lights while the disk is
fast-forwarding. All other transport buttons are OFF during fast for-
ward. When the disk reaches the end of the clip in Clip Play mode
(or the end of the list in List Play mode), fast forward stops. All
transport buttons except REC and AUTO EDIT are canceled by
pressing FF $$. Record and Auto Edit functions can be canceled
only by pressing the STOP button.
JOG Jog Reverse — Jogs the disk backward by one field or one frame
depending upon the current output mode setting. Press and hold for
about one second to jog continuously at approximately 1/4 play
speed.
The ❙# JOG button may also be used to immediately seek the disk
to the 00.00.00.00 timecode point (start of a clip). To seek, press and
hold the STOP button, then press the ❙# JOG button. The disk
immediately seeks to 00.00.00.00 timecode.
All transport buttons except REC and AUTO EDIT are canceled
while jogging. Record and Auto Edit functions can be canceled only
by pressing the STOP button.
JOG Jog Forward — Jogs the disk forward by one field or one frame
depending upon the current output mode setting. Press and hold for
about one second to jog continuously at approximately 1/4 play
speed.
The JOG $❙ button may also be used to immediately seek the disk
to the end of a clip. To seek, press and hold the STOP button, then
press the JOG $❙ button. The disk immediately seeks to the end of
the clip.
All transport buttons except REC and AUTO EDIT are canceled
while jogging. Record and Auto Edit functions can be canceled only
by pressing the STOP button.
STOP Stop — Immediately stops any type of disk playback (play forward,
play reverse, fast forward, rewind, etc.), any recording operation, or
any Auto Edit function. When the disk is stopped, the button LED
lights.
Press and hold STOP, then press a JOG button to immediately seek
the disk to either the start or end of a clip. All transport buttons are
canceled when STOP is pressed.
2-18
Clip ID Locked Clip ID Locked — indicates whether a Clip ID has been locked (or
write protected). If the LED is red, then the currently cued Clip ID is
locked and cannot be over-recorded, modified, moved, or deleted.
To lock the current Clip ID from the Control Panel, press Shift +
REC to toggle the status between “locked” and “unlocked”.
Shuttle — Assigns the Shuttle function to the control panel rotary

Shuttle knob. When Shuttle is toggled active (LED on), any other transport
function which was underway (except for Record and Auto Edit) is
canceled and STOP is automatically selected. While Shuttle is active, 2
the rotary knob may be used to rewind or advance the disk at
slower-than normal and faster-than normal play speeds. There are
10 forward and 10 reverse speeds.
When Shuttle is enabled, STOP is also selected and play speed is

set to zero. As the rotary knob is turned clockwise through two
mechanical “clicks,” play speed increments to 0.250 speed. Continu-
ing through two more clicks, the play speed increments to 0.500
play speed. As the knob is turned further, play speed increases after
each group of two clicks to a maximum of 60x normal speed.
The disk stops if it reaches the physical end of the clip during shut-
tle. However, if the knob is turned in the opposite direction, shuttle
will resume in the new direction. Pressing any other transport but-
ton during Shuttle will cancel Shuttle operation.
Jog — Assigns the Jog function to the control panel rotary knob.
Jog When Jog is active, the button LED lights. Any other transport func-
tion which was underway (except for Record and Auto Edit) is can-
celed and STOP is selected automatically. While Jog is active, the
rotary knob may be used to step the disk in single field or single
frame increments depending upon the current output mode setting.
The rotary knob is mechanically detented. Each mechanical click

denotes a single field (or single frame) incrementation. Use the
rotary knob to step forward and backward through the disk mate-
rial. Clockwise rotation jogs the disk forward; counter-clockwise
rotation jogs the disk backward.
Turning the rotary knob at a constant velocity of approximately one

rotation per second will play the disk at 1.0x normal speed.
2-19
Var Play — Assigns the Var Play function (variable play speed) to
Var Play the control panel rotary knob. When Var Play is active, the button
LED lights. Any other transport function which was underway
(except for Record and Auto Edit) is canceled, and one of the two
PLAY buttons (either # PLAY or PLAY $) is automatically illumi-
nated. Which PLAY button is selected depends upon the value of
the last used vari-speed operation. If the last used play speed was in
the reverse direction, then # PLAY is selected. If the play speed was
in the forward direction, then PLAY $ is selected.
While Var Play is selected, the rotary knob adjusts disk play speed.
Play speed range is from -3.000 up to +3.000 times normal in 0.001
increments. The play speed is changed by an increment of 0.01 with
each mechanical click (detent) of the rotary knob. Alternately, you
may enter a play speed value at the numeric keypad, then press the
Var Play button. This places the disk directly into the specified play
speed. You may enter a value that is greater than +/-3.000 play
speed in this manner.
Cancel Var Play by selecting another transport function. The last-

used Var Play value is remembered when the function is again
assigned.
TAKE TAKE — In Clip Play mode, used to select sub-menus and sub-
menu parameters in the User Setup and Engineering Setup menu
displays, as viewed on the “status” composite video output. To
select submenus and submenu parameters, turn the rotary knob to
move the pointer to the desired submenu or parameter name, then
press TAKE to select it.
In List Play mode press TAKE to advance to the next item in the clip
play list.
Rotary Knob — Used for Jog, Shuttle, and Var Play transport con-
trols as described above.
In the User Setup and Engineering Setup menu displays, the rotary
knob moves the pointer up and down to point to the desired sub-
menu or parameter. Press TAKE to select a parameter for adjust-
ment. Rotate the knob to cycle through the available parameter
options (counter-clockwise rotation cycles to the beginning of the
options and clockwise rotation cycles to the end of the options).
Once the desired option is selected with the rotary knob, press
TAKE again to accept the change for that parameter.
2-20
In List Play mode, press and hold down the CLIP ID button and
then turn the rotary knob to move a highlighting cursor up and
down the currently loaded play list. This action cues each clip as it is
highlighted (counter-clockwise rotation moves the cursor up to the
beginning of the list and clockwise rotation moves the cursor down
to the end of the list).
Auto Edit
The Auto Edit subpanel is illustrated below. 2
AUTO EDIT
DDR
VTR
Preview Review Enable Recorder
AUTO EDIT Auto Edit — (together with the REC button) engages the Auto Edit
function, which performs a machine-to-machine automatic edit
between the Abekas 6000 server and an external VTR (or DDR) con-
nected to one of the RS422 ports on the rear panel of the Abekas
6000. Please refer to the Abekas 6000 Installation guide for informa-
tion on Auto Edit hardware connections. To set up and perform
Auto Edit functions, the Enable button must be turned ON. For
complete instructions on using the Auto Edit feature, please refer to
the description in Section 7: Auto Edit.
Preview — Used in conjunction with the Auto Edit function. The

Preview
Preview button is active only if the Enable button is turned ON,
and when the minimum criteria for an Auto Edit event have been
set. Refer to the description of Auto Edit (above) for more informa-
tion. When the Auto Edit criteria are set, pressing Preview performs
an Auto Edit Preview. The LED in the Preview button illuminates.
The record and player devices seek to their respective preroll points,
and play through the preroll interval. At the auto edit IN point, the
record device switches to Bypass ON, through which the player
device is monitored. At the Auto Edit OUT point, the record device
switches back to off-disk (or off-tape) playback. At the end of the
postroll interval, both player and recorder stop. The LED in the Pre-
view button turns OFF when the preview is completed. Press the
STOP button at any time to cancel the Auto Edit Preview.
2-21
Review — Used in conjunction with the Auto Edit function. The

Review button is active only if the Enable button is turned ON, and a suc-
cessful Auto Edit recording event has been performed. Refer to the
description of AutoEdit (preceding) for more information. After a
successful Auto Edit recording has been performed, pressing
Review performs an Auto Edit Review. The LED in the button illu-
minates. Only the record device seeks to the preroll point of the
previously performed edit (the player remains wherever it happens
to be), and plays through the preroll, edit record, and postroll inter-
vals without stopping. Never does the recorder switch to Bypass
ON. At the end of the postroll interval, the recorder stops playback.
The LED in the button turns OFF when Review is completed. Press
the STOP button at any time to cancel the Auto Edit Review.
Enable — Used in conjunction with the Auto Edit function. The

Enable Enable button enables the Auto Edit function, and allows you to set
up and perform an auto edit event. Refer to the description of Auto
Edit (preceding) for more information. While the Enable button is
turned OFF, the Panel, Preview, Recorder, and AUTO EDIT but-
tons are not active.
Once some or all of the criteria are set for an Auto Edit event, you
may choose to temporarily turn off the Auto Edit function while pre-
serving the data entered thus far. This disables the Auto Edit func-
tion and the panel resumes control over only the Abekas 6000 DDR
system. Had the Panel button been set to VTR prior to toggling OFF
the Enable button, the Panel button reverts to the DDR setting
when the Enable button is turned OFF. When the Enable button is
turned OFF, the two LEDs for the status of the Recorder button are
also both OFF.
DDR Recorder — Used only in conjunction with the Auto Edit function
VTR
Recorder and active only if Enable is turned ON. Refer to the description of
Auto Edit (preceding) for further information. The Recorder button
determines which device (Abekas 6000 DDR or the external VTR)
becomes the recorder and which becomes the player for an Auto
Edit event. When the Recorder button is toggled to illuminate the
VTR symbol, the external VTR is set as the recording device with the
Abekas 6000 DDR as the player. When the Recorder button is tog-
gled to illuminate the DDR symbol, the Abekas 6000 DDR is the
recording device, with the external VTR as the player.
2-22
DDR Panel — Used only in conjunction with the Auto Edit function and
VTR
active only if the Enable button is turned ON. Refer to the descrip-
tion of Auto Edit (preceding) for further information. While the
Panel
Panel button is active, it determines which device is currently under

the direct control of the Abekas 6000 control panel. When the DDR
symbol is selected, the control panel controls the Abekas 6000 DDR.
When the VTR symbol is selected, the Abekas 6000 main chassis
passes commands from the control panel to an external VTR con-
nected to one of the RS422 ports on the Abekas 6000 main chassis.
2
By toggling the Panel button, you may alternately set up the Auto
Edit IN and OUT points for both the recorder and the player device.
Please note that the Enable button interacts with the Panel button.
Once some or all of the criteria are set for an Auto Edit event, you
may choose to temporarily turn OFF the Auto Edit function while
preserving the data entered thus far. To do so, the Enable button is
toggled OFF. This disables the Auto Edit function and the control
panel resumes control over only the Abekas 6000 DDR system (not
the VTR). Had the Panel button been set to VTR prior to toggling
the Enable button OFF, the Panel button reverts to the DDR setting
when the Enable button is turned OFF.
2-23
2-24
Quick Contents
Section 3:
• Overview
• Status Overlay
Status Overlay Menus
• Menu Tree
• Menu Familiarization
Overview
This section explains the Abekas 6000 Status Overlay. It will quickly
familiarize you with the Status Overlay structure and provide you with
an overview of all the menus and their parameters.
The menu section of the Status Overlay indicates the current state of
the system, and allows you to control all system functions using a
series of logically arranged sub-menus. The display is an “overlay”
which floats over the composite video status output.
Topics covered in this section include:
• Status Overlay
• Menu Tree
3-2
Status Overlay
Status Overlay
This section describes the Status Overlay menus provided by the com-
posite analog video “status” output of the Abekas 6000.
The following topics are covered in this section:
• Menu Tree
The illustration below shows a typical Status Overlay display.

3

>CHANNEL CONFIG
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
RS422 PORT ASSIGN
Menu Display AUTO EDIT SETUP
1 REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
ChA Server-171
Transport Status Clip:0000200 00:00:00:00 F1-2
2 STOP 0.00
POWER
SLEEP
TV VOLUME CHANNEL STEREO
VIDEO TIMER
The Status Overlay contains two primary sections:
Menu Section — Displays sub-menu choices, sub-menu parameters

and softkey assignments. Sub-menu parameters and softkey func-
1
tions change depending on the sub-menu selected.
Transport Status Section — Displays the selected video channel,

server name, clip ID, disk transport status, current play speed, and
2
timecode position.
3-3
The status overlay may be set to one of three states:

Partial Full None

>CHANNEL CONFIG
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
RS422 PORT ASSIGN
AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
ChA Server-171 ChA Server-171

Clip:0000200 00:00:00:00 F1-2 Clip:0000200 00:00:00:00 F1-2
STOP 0.00 STOP 0.00
POWER POWER POWER
SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP

■ Partial — Displays only the Transport Status section.

■ Full — Displays both display sections: Menu, and Transport Status.
■ None — No status overlay is displayed. Allows you to see the
complete video output.
Press the Menu button to toggle the status overlay between the three
ON and OFF states (Partial, Full, and None).
The illustration below shows the information fields present in a typical

full status overlay.
Menu Title 1 Abekas 6000 HOME MENU (1/10)

>CHANNEL CONFIG
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
RS422 PORT ASSIGN
Sub-menu/Parameter 2 AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
Channel 4 Server
3 ChA Server-171
Clip ID
Clip:0000200 00:00:00:00 F1-2 7 Output Mode
5 STOP 0.00
Transport Status 6 Disk Position
8
9 Transport Speed
3-4
Status Overlay
The following descriptions are keyed to the flagged items in the illus-
tration shown above..
Menu Title — Displays the title of the currently selected menu or

sub-menu. The title of the menu always appears in UPPER case let-
1
ters.
Sub-menu/Parameter — Displays sub-menu choices, and sub-menu

parameter assignments. Sub-menu parameter functions change,
2
depending on the sub-menu selected.
Channel — Displays the currently selected video channel (ChA

through ChH).
3
3
Server — Displays the name of the server that this control panel is
connected to.
4
Clip ID — Displays the currently loaded Clip ID (local or network).

5
Disk Position — Displays the current disk position within the cur-
rently loaded clip, in timecode notation (HH:MM:SS:FF).
6
Output Mode — Displays the output mode of the current clip. Each
clip can be set to either: f1 (field 1), f2 (field 2), F1-2 (frame).
7
Transport Status — Displays current disk transport state: PLAY,

STOP, RECORDING, FREEZE ON, BYPASS ON, etc.
8
Transport Speed — (Directly to the right of Transport Status) Indi-

cates current disk play speed. All speeds, including forward play,
9
reverse play, shuttle, and Var Play (variable play) are shown.
The full playback speed range is from -60.00 reverse to +60.00 for-
ward (entered numerically at the keypad). If the rotary knob is used
to set the speed, the range is from -3.000 to +3.000 times normal.
3-5
Menu Tree
The Abekas 6000 menus are hierarchically arranged. The USER SETUP
main menu has two levels of sub-menus. The illustration below shows
the menu tree for the USER SETUP main menu:
USER SETUP
Home Menu
CHANNEL CONFIG SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM STATUS RS422 AUTO EDIT REMOTE TIMING PANEL SETUP GPI SETUP DIAGNOSTICS USER SETUP
PORT ASSIGN SETUP SETUP SAVE/RECALL
Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
SOFTWARE MEDIA STORAGE TIME OF DAY GPI IN ASSIGN GPI OUT ASSIGN
VERSION
Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
VIDEO TIMING AUDIO SETUP TEMPERATURE DISK ARRAY FANS POWER SUPPLY CHANNEL
MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR CONTROLLERS
Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
Menu Navigation
Press the Menu button to enable the status overlay on the composite
video status output. Press Menu to toggle the Menu sections ON (if not
currently displayed). The top level menu provides access to the sub-
menu choices. To access a sub-menu, return to the top level menu by
pressing the Exit button (usually once, sometimes twice), then high-
light the desired sub-menu using the rotary knob and press the TAKE
button.
To exit a sub-menu you can either press the Exit button or use the
rotary knob to select (EXIT) (at the bottom of each sub-menu) and
press TAKE.
Menu Familiarization
This section includes an overview of the USER SETUP menu parame-
ters. These parameters are used to configure the Abekas 6000 for your
particular working requirements and diagnose system problems. All
parameters can be saved to memory so the server will remain config-
ured to your specifications. Multiple User Setups can be saved and
recalled if desired.
3-6
Status Overlay
The Abekas 6000 menus include:

■ Abekas 6000 HOME MENU (press Exit once or twice to return here)
• CHANNEL CONFIG
• SYSTEM SETUP
• SYSTEM STATUS
• RS422 PORT ASSIGN
• AUTO EDIT SETUP
• REMOTE TIMING SETUP
• PANEL SETUP
• GPI SETUP
3
• DIAGNOSTICS
• USER SETUP SAVE/RECALL
Changing Menu Parameters

When the “full” menu is displayed (toggling the Menu button), the
rotary knob is taken out of transport control mode and the green LED
under the TAKE button is turned ON. This indicates that the rotary
knob and TAKE button are to be used for menu selection and parame-
ter adjustments.
Note: To regain transport control when the “full” menu is displayed, press Menu to
toggle the menu back to “partial” display. The green LED under the TAKE button will
turn off and the LED in the Jog button will turn ON.
■ To change a menu parameter setting:

1. Highlight the desired parameter with the rotary knob and press the
TAKE button. The highlight (pointer) will turn into a question mark
(?) and the TAKE button LED will flash green indicating it’s in the
parameter adjust mode.
2. Rotate the knob to the desired value and press TAKE to set the
value. The question mark will revert to a pointer (>), and the TAKE
button LED will stop flashing. The rotary knob can now be used to
select other parameters or to exit the sub-menu.
3-7
Some parameters allow numeric keypad values to be entered

directly. Simply select the desired parameter using the rotary knob,
enter a value with the numeric keypad and press TAKE to set the
value. The display will update with the new value.
Note: You can cancel a parameter selection that was made using the rotary knob or
with the numeric keypad by pressing the Exit button before pressing TAKE to set the
selection. This maintains the original selection (or numeric value) for that parameter.
Abekas 6000 HOME MENU

Depending upon the current menu displayed, press the Exit button
once or twice to access the HOME MENU.

>CHANNEL CONFIG
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
RS422 PORT ASSIGN
AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
The HOME MENU is the top level menu. From here, you access any of
the sub-menus using the rotary knob to highlight the desired sub-menu
and pressing the TAKE button. From a sub-menu, you must first return
to the HOME MENU before you can select a different sub-menu. Do
this by pressing Exit.
Hint: If you don’t see the menu overlay displayed on the composite output monitor,
press the Menu button to toggle to the full or partial menu display.
3-8
Status Overlay
CHANNEL CONFIG Menu

The CHANNEL CONFIG menu is used to configure the record format,
editing handles, remote device track enables for each channel.
From the HOME MENU, highlight CHANNEL CONFIG using the rotary
knob and press TAKE.
CHANNEL CONFIG (1/8)

>User Channel = ChA
Record DV25/50 = DV50
Open-ended limit = 00.10.00.00
Handle Duration = 00.00.10.00
Handle Enable = ON
3
Remote New Trks = V--
Remote V Enable = V-
(EXIT)
■ User Channel — selects the channel (ChA through ChH) for

configuration. Parameters adjusted in this menu apply to the
selected User Channel.
Highlight with the rotary knob and press TAKE. Rotate the knob to
select the desired channel (ChA through ChH) to be configured,
then press TAKE.
■ Record DV25/50 — sets the video record format for all new clip
recordings. Select a compression format that best suits your image
quality and disk space usage requirements.
select the desired video record format, then press TAKE.
• DV25 — DVCPRO (4:1:1) compression at 25Mb/s. provides a total

of 7.0 hours of 8-bit digital video storage on a standard Abekas
6000 system.
• DV50 — DVCPRO-50 (4:2:2) compression at 50Mb/s (greater
image accuracy). provides a total of 3.5 hours of 8-bit digital video
storage on a standard Abekas 6000 system.
3-9
■ Open-ended limit — sets a time limit for open-ended clip

recordings.
Highlight Open-ended limit with the rotary knob and press TAKE.
Rotate the knob to the desired value or type a value into the
numeric keypad. Press TAKE to set the value.
■ Handle Duration — selects the Handle Duration before and after a

clip as seen by an edit controller. This parameter provides a Preroll
“handle” to an edit controller when a clip being used for editing
begins on or near 00.00.00.00.
• range = 00.00.00 to 05.00.00 (5 minutes)
Highlight Handle Duration with the rotary knob and press TAKE.
numeric keypad. Press TAKE to set the value.
■ Handle Enable — sets the Handle Duration parameter ON or OFF.

toggle between OFF or ON, then press TAKE.
■ Remote New Trks — defines what elements are included when a

“new clip” is created from an external device, as communicated to
the Abekas 6000 via Sony, Louth, or Odetics protocols. You can
toggle this parameter to select which combination of track elements
to be included when the external device creates a “new clip”.
Note: The Abekas 6000 system must be configured properly (in the SYSTEM SETUP
menu), to allow any Key element to be recorded. For example, if this parameter is set
on Channel A, then ChA+ChB must be configured for Video+Key for any key element
to be created from an external device.
select the desired setting, then press TAKE.
• V- - — The new clip contains Video element only (default).
• -K- — The new clip contains Key element only.
• VK- — The new clip contains Video and Key elements.
• - -A — The new clip contains Audio element only.
• V-A — The new clip contains Video and Audio elements.
• -KA — The new clip contains Key and Audio elements.
• VKA — The new clip contains Video, Key and Audio elements.
3-10
Status Overlay
■ Remote V Enable — defines whether both the Video and Key

elements or only the Video element is recorded into a clip while the
Abekas 6000 is under the control of an external edit controller. This
parameter is channel-specific.
Note: The Abekas 6000 system must be configured properly (in the SYSTEM SETUP
menu), to allow any Key element to be recorded. For example, if this parameter is set
on Channel A, then ChA+ChB must be configured for Video+Key for any key element
to be created from an external device.
Highlight with the rotary knob and press TAKE. Rotate the knob to 3
select the desired setting, then press TAKE.
• V- — When the external edit controller sends a command to edit

into the Video track on the Abekas 6000, only the Video element
in the clip on the Abekas 6000 is enabled for recording during the
edit record event.
• -K — When the external edit controller sends a command to edit
into the Video track on the Abekas 6000, only the Key element in
the clip on the Abekas 6000 is enabled for recording during the
edit record event.
• VK — When the external edit controller sends a command to edit
into the Video track on the Abekas 6000, both the Video and Key
elements in the clip on the Abekas 6000 is enabled for recording
during the edit record event.
3-11
SYSTEM SETUP Menu

The SYSTEM SETUP menu is used to set up system-wide parameters
such as the Video Standard and Channel Pair configuration. System
timing and Audio Setup adjustments are also made from this menu.
From the HOME MENU, highlight SYSTEM SETUP using the rotary
SYSTEM SETUP (1/9)

>Video Standard = 525
Chnl A/B tracks = Video/Video
Chnl C/D tracks = Video/Video
Chnl E/F tracks = Video/Video
Chnl G/H tracks = Video/Video
Net Delete = OFF
VIDEO TIMING
AUDIO SETUP
(EXIT)
■ Video Standard — displays and changes the operating line

standard of the Abekas 6000. Refer to the Installation and
Maintenance manual for procedures on changing the video
standard.
• 525 — selects 525 line standard.
• 625 — selects 625 line standard.
Note: Use caution when changing the line standard parameter! Once a change is
made to this parameter, the video, key and audio material already recorded on the
Abekas 6000 disk drives will be rendered useless! This original material is not
destroyed, but it cannot be played properly when the line standard is changed from
the original setting. If you change this parameter in error, then simply change it back
to the previous setting — but do so before you make any new recordings!
3-12
Status Overlay
■ Ch A/B Tracks — selects the A/B channel pair configuration.
Highlight Ch A/B Tracks with the rotary knob and press TAKE.
Rotate the knob to select the desired channel configuration, then
press TAKE to accept the selection.
• Video/Video — sets channel pair as independent video channels.

Channels can be acquired and operated independently from each
other. (Factory default setting)
• Video+Key — sets channel pair as synchronized Video + Key
channels. ChA is the Video channel and ChB is the synchronized
Key channel (luminance only). The Video channel is the “master”
channel and when acquired and selected, the key (“slave”) chan-
nel follows. 3
• Time Delay — sets channel pair to Time Delay mode. In this
mode, input video is recorded on the “master” channel (ChA) and
played out using a set delay time on the “slave” channel (ChB).
Normal operations can be performed with the “master” channel
(ChA) but the “slave” channel (ChB) is locked out of normal oper-
ations and dedicated to play-out only.
■ Ch C/D Tracks — selects the C/D channel pair configuration. See
description above.
■ Ch E/F Tracks — selects the E/F channel pair configuration. See
description above.
■ Ch G/H Tracks — selects the G/H channel pair configuration. See
description above.
■ Net Delete — toggles Net Delete parameter ON or OFF. When ON,
Net Delete allows an Abekas 6000 server to delete individual Clips
from remote Abekas 6000 servers. Delete commands are sent via an
ethernet network. When OFF, clips can only be deleted on the local
server.
3-13
■ VIDEO TIMING — selects the VIDEO TIMING sub-menu. This

menu provides video timing parameters for each VIDEO board (1
through 4) installed in the Abekas 6000. Adjustments made to a
VIDEO board apply to its associated video channel pair.
Highlight with the rotary knob and press TAKE to enter the sub-
menu.
VIDEO TIMING (1/7)

>System H Phase = 0.02 Pix
Board Number = 1
Channels = Channel A/B
Horiz Phase = 0.02 Pix
ChA Pedestal = OFF
ChB Pedestal = OFF
(EXIT)
Note: Only qualified engineering personnel should adjust the following parameters.
■ System H Phase — adjusts the horizontal position of the picture at

the output to attain timing with other sources in your system. Each
adjustment “step” changes the timing in 0.25 pixel steps.
Highlight System H Phase with the rotary knob and press TAKE.
numeric keypad. Press TAKE to set the system H phase value.
• Range = -192.00 Pix to +64.00 Pix (pixels)

• Default = 0.02 Pix
■ Board Number — selects the board (1 through 4) to be adjusted.
select the desired board number, then press TAKE to accept the
selection.
3-14
Status Overlay
■ Channels — displays the video channel pair associated with the

board number selected. This parameter cannot be selected with the
rotary knob.
■ Horiz Phase — adjusts the Horizontal Phase for the selected video
board number. Each adjustment “step” changes the timing in 0.25
pixel steps.
Highlight Horiz Phase with the rotary knob and press TAKE.
numeric keypad. Press TAKE to set the horizontal phase value.
• Range = -192.00 Pix to +64.00 Pix (pixels)

• Default = 0.02 Pix 3
■ ChA (C,E,G) Pedestal — toggles 7.5 IRE Pedestal ON or OFF for
Channels A, C, E, or G depending on the board selected. This
parameter applies to the NTSC analog video monitor output only.
The default setting is ON.
■ ChB (D,F,H) Pedestal — toggles 7.5 IRE Pedestal ON or OFF for

Channels B, D, F, or H depending on the board selected. This
parameter applies to the NTSC analog video monitor output only.
The default setting is ON.
3-15
■ AUDIO SETUP — selects the AUDIO SETUP sub-menu. This menu

provides audio setup parameters for each AUDIO board (1 through
4) installed in the Abekas 6000.
menu.
AUDIO SETUP (1/6)

>Board Number = 1
Channels = Channel A/B
Input Source = AES
Input From = SRConv
Monitor Sel = Output
(EXIT)
■ Board Number — selects the board (1 through 4) to be adjusted.
select the desired board number, then press TAKE to accept the
selection.
■ Channels — displays the audio channel pair associated with the

board number selected. This parameter cannot be selected with the
rotary knob.
■ Input Source — selects the audio input source signal.
Highlight Input Source with the rotary knob and press TAKE.
Rotate the knob to select the desired audio input source setting,
then press TAKE to accept the selection.
• AES — selects the AES audio input.

• Silence — selects internally generated audio Silence.
• Embedded — selects the Embedded audio input from the SDI
input to the selected channel.
• Tones — selects internally generated audio Tones.
3-16
Status Overlay
■ Input From — selects direct or sample rate converted digital audio

input into system.
Highlight Input From with the rotary knob and press TAKE. Rotate
the knob to select the desired setting, then press TAKE to accept the
selection.
• SRConv — selects digital audio input from the output of the sam-
ple rate converter (default setting).
• AES — selects digital audio input directly from the AES audio
input.
■ Monitor Sel — selects audio signal for Monitoring.
Highlight Monitor Sel with the rotary knob and press TAKE. Rotate
3
the knob to select the desired monitor source, then press TAKE to
accept the selection.
• Output — selects system output audio as the monitor source.

• Input — selects system input audio as the monitor source.
SYSTEM STATUS Menu

The SYSTEM STATUS menu is used to verify the system’s software ver-
sion, media storage available, and the “time of day” input timecode
sources. The parameters shown in all of the SYSTEM STATUS sub-
menus (except for one parameter in the TIME OF DAY sub-menu) are
status display items only.
From the HOME MENU, highlight SYSTEM STATUS using the rotary
SYSTEM STATUS (1/4)

>SOFTWARE VERSION
MEDIA STORAGE
TIME OF DAY
(EXIT)
3-17
■ SOFTWARE VERSION — selects the SOFTWARE VERSION sub-

menu. This menu displays the current software version number, and
date and time of release, for the Abekas 6000 main chassis.
menu.
SOFTWARE VERSION (1/2)

>Abekas 6000 Main = 01.52A
DEC 25 1999
10:15:02 AM
(EXIT)
■ MEDIA STORAGE — selects the MEDIA STORAGE sub-menu. This

menu indicates the status of the disk arrays and amounts of media
storage available for use with both the DV25 and DV50 bit rates.
menu.
MEDIA STORAGE (1/9)

>DV25 Total Disk = 24:14:12:00
DV25 Total Free = 08:15:12:03
DV25 Max Clip = 08:03:14:12
DV50 Total Disk = 12:07:06:00
DV50 Total Free = 04:07:36:02
DV50 Max Clip = 04:01:37:06
Array Online = Main/Ex1/---
Parity Status = RAID-0
(EXIT)
■ DV25 Total Disk — indicates the total amount of disk space that’s
available regardless of how many clips are recorded on this server.
This value never changes for a given server, assuming no disks are
added. In a server with disk expansion, this value shows the total
system storage. Value shown with respect to DV25 (25Mb/s) bit rate.
3-18
Status Overlay
■ DV25 Total Free — indicates the total amount of disk space that’s
currently free on this server. This “free” total includes all fragments
of open space on the disk array. Value shown with respect to DV25
(25Mb/s) bit rate.
■ DV25 Max Clip — indicates the largest amount of contiguous disk
space that’s currently available on this server. This figure is
expressed to the user as the longest new clip that can be recorded
on the disk array. Value shown with respect to DV25 (25Mb/s) bit
rate.
■ DV50 Total Disk — indicates the total amount of disk space that’s
available regardless of how many clips are recorded on this server.
This value never changes for a given server, assuming no disks are
added. In a server with disk expansion, this value shows the total 3
system storage. Value shown with respect to DV50 (50Mb/s) bit rate.
■ DV50 Total Free — indicates the total amount of disk space that’s
currently free on this server. This “free” total includes all fragments
of open space on the disk array. Value shown with respect to DV50
(50Mb/s) bit rate.
■ DV50 Max Clip — indicates the largest amount of contiguous disk
space that’s currently available on this server. This figure is
expressed to the user as the longest new clip that can be recorded
on the disk array. Value shown with respect to DV50 (50Mb/s) bit
rate.
■ Array Online — indicates which disk array chassis’ are currently
online in this server.
• Not Present — None of the disk arrays are online.
• Main/- - -/- - - — Only the disk array in the Abekas 6000 Main
Chassis is online.
• Main/Ex1/- - - — The disk array in the Abekas 6000 Main Chassis
and in the Disk Expansion chassis #1 are online.
• Main/Ex1/Ex2 — The disk array in the Abekas 6000 Main Chassis,
in the Disk Expansion chassis #1 and Disk Expansion chassis #2
are online.
■ Parity Status — indicates the parity status of the server. This
parameter indicates if the parity option is fitted.
• RAID-0 — The parity option is not installed in this server.
• RAID-3 — The parity option is installed in this server.
3-19
■ TIME OF DAY — selects the TIME OF DAY sub-menu. This menu

provides the current time and date, selection of the “time of day”
source, and status of the “time of day” timecode inputs.
menu.
TIME OF DAY (1/2)

Current Time = 01:14:22PM
Current Date = 12-DEC-1999
>T.O.D. Source = LTC
Ext.LTC Input = 01;14;22;07
Ref.VITC Input = Not Present
(EXIT)
■ Current Time — indicates the current time of day, which is derived

from the T.O.D. Source parameter. This value increments while this
menu is active.
■ Current Date — indicates the current date. This value increments
while this menu is active.
■ T.O.D. Source — selects the “time of day” input timecode signal.
Highlight T.O.D. Source with the rotary knob and press TAKE.
Rotate the knob to select the desired “time of day” source timecode,
• VITC — selects VITC “time of day” from the Reference input.

• LTC — selects LTC “time of day” from the Ext. LTC input.
• Internal — selects Internal “time of day” generated from the Abe-
kas 6000 internal clock.
■ Ext.LTC Input — indicates whether a valid timecode signal is
applied to the “External LTC” input connector (found on the rear of
the Abekas 6000 main server chassis).
• Not Present — No external LTC input signal is present.
• Not Valid — An LTC input signal is present, but the signal does
not contain a valid LTC timecode signal. For example, someone
3-20
Status Overlay
mistakenly connects a cable with a standard audio signal to this

connector.
• 04:15:32:07 — An LTC input signal is present, with a valid LTC
timecode signal. The timecode shown reflects the value of the LTC
signal. When this timecode value is displayed with a colon or
period (“:” or “.”) between decimals, the timecode is NDF (non-
drop frame). When this timecode value is displayed with a semi-
colon or comma (“;” or “,”) between decimals, the timecode is DF
(drop frame).
■ Ref.VITC Input — indicates whether a valid VITC timecode signal
is present in the “Reference Loop” BNC input connector (found on
the rear of the Abekas 6000 main server chassis.
• Not Present — No reference input signal is present. For example, 3
the reference cable is disconnected.
• Not Valid — An reference input signal is present, but the vertical
interval of this signal does not contain a valid VITC timecode sig-
nal.
• 04:15:32:07 — An reference input signal is present, with a valid
VITC timecode signal. The timecode shown reflects the value of
the VITC signal. When this timecode value is displayed with a
colon or period (“:” or “.”) between decimals, the timecode is NDF
(non-drop frame). When this timecode value is displayed with a
semi-colon or comma (“;” or “,”) between decimals, the timecode
is DF (drop frame).
3-21
RS422 PORT ASSIGN Menu

The RS422 PORT ASSIGN menu displays the status of all thirteen RS422
ports on the Abekas 6000. It provides the ability to assign a serial com-
munications protocol to each RS422 serial port (1 through 13). When
sony-master protocol is assigned to a port, you can designate which
channel (ChA-ChH) is assigned to that port.
The menu is made up of four columns: PT (Port), PROTOCOL, CHNL

(Channel), and ENBL (Enable). Turning the rotary knob moves the
highlight between columns that can be adjusted for each RS422 port.
Note: Information displayed in brackets is [read-only] and cannot be adjusted.
From the HOME MENU, highlight RS422 PORT ASSIGN using the
rotary knob and press TAKE.
RS422 PORT ASSIGN (1/40)

PT PROTOCOL CHNL ENBL
1 >sony-slave [A] [OFF]
2 louth [None] OFF
3 sony-slave [C] [OFF]
4 sony-slave [D] [OFF]
5 sony-slave [None] [OFF]
7 sony-master A [OFF]
8 sony-master B [OFF]
9 sony-master None [OFF]
13 control panel [ABCD] [ON]
(EXIT)
■ PT Column — displays the RS422 port numbers (1 through 13).
3-22
Status Overlay
■ PROTOCOL Column — displays the communications protocol for

the selected RS422 port number. The factory default settings are:
ports 1-6 = sony-slave, ports 7-12 = sony-master, port 13 = control
panel.
select the desired communications protocol for the selected RS422
port, then press TAKE to accept the selection.
• sony-slave — protocol used when port is connected to an Edit

Controller or Slo-Mo Controller. Ports 1 through 8 can be assigned
sony-slave protocol.
• control panel — protocol used when port is connected to an
Abekas 6000 Control Panel. Ports 1 through 7 can be assigned 3
control panel protocol. Port 13 is dedicated to the primary control
panel and cannot be selected.
• sony-master — protocol used when port is connected to a VTR
for control via Auto Edit. Ports 7 through 12 can be assigned sony-
master protocol. Ports 9 through 12 are dedicated to sony-master
protocol only.
• louth — protocol used when port is connected to automation sys-
tems that use louth protocol. Ports 1 through 8 can be assigned
louth protocol.
• odetics — protocol used when port is connected to automation
systems that use odetics protocol. Ports 1 through 8 can be
assigned odetics protocol.
■ CHNL Column — displays the channel (ChA-ChH) assigned to the
selected RS422 port number. Unless the protocol is “sony-master”,
the Channel column is “read-only” and cannot be selected.
For “control panel” protocol, the Channel column displays the chan-
nels that are currently acquired by the Abekas 6000 control panel.
For ports that are assigned with “sony-master” protocol, this column
displays which channel (ChA-ChH) the port is assigned to. The fac-
tory default is “None”. A channel may never have more than one
port assigned to it at a given time. Also, a channel may only be
assigned if the hardware configuration includes the channel (e.g.
ChG cannot be assigned on a four channel server!). When assigning
a channel to a “sony-master” port, only available channels can be
selected. To assign a channel that is currently assigned to another
port, that channel must first be released from its original port.
3-23
To assign a channel to a “sony-master” port, highlight the CHNL col-

umn for the desired port with the rotary knob and press TAKE.
Rotate the knob to select the desired channel (ChA-ChH), then press
TAKE to accept the selection.
■ ENBL Column — displays the “enable” status for the each RS422
port (1-13). RS422 communications will either be OFF or ON for
each port. Enable status is “read-only” for all protocols except
“louth”.
For ports that are assigned “sony-slave” or “odetics” protocol, press-

ing the RS422 Remote button on the control panel will change the
port Enable status to ON for the port assigned to the active channel
on the control panel.
If a port is assigned “control panel” protocol, its Enable status will

change to ON as soon as a channel is acquired by the Abekas 6000
control panel connected to that port.
For ports that are assigned “sony-master” protocol (for use with the
Auto Edit function), pressing the Auto Edit Enable button on the
Abekas 6000 control panel will change the port Enable status to ON
for the port that is assigned to the active channel on the control
panel.
For ports that are assigned “louth” protocol, the Enable status is
assigned in the RS422 PORT ASSIGN menu. To change the Enable
status for a port assigned with “louth” protocol, highlight the ENBL
column for the desired port with the rotary knob and press TAKE.
Rotate the knob to toggle between OFF or ON, then press TAKE.
3-24
Status Overlay
AUTO EDIT SETUP Menu

The AUTO EDIT SETUP Menu is used to set up and configure the Abe-
kas 6000 for Auto Edit operations with a VTR. Each channel (ChA
through ChH) can control a VTR. With a fully loaded system (8 chan-
nels), up to seven Abekas 6000 control panels and six VTRs can be
connected to the Abekas 6000 to create six cuts-only edit stations.
From the HOME MENU, highlight AUTO EDIT SETUP using the rotary
AUTO EDIT SETUP (1/14)

>VTR Edit Port = 7
User Channel = ChA 3
VTR Audio Trks = Digital
Clip PreRoll = 00.01.00
Clip Edit Delay = +00 Fields
Src VTR Delay = +00 Fields
PostRoll = 00.01.00
VTR PreRoll = 00.03.00
VTR Edit Delay = +00 Fields
Src Clip Delay = +00 Fields
Jog Method = Use search
Jog Speed = 0.25
Jog Duration = 00.00.04
(EXIT)
■ VTR Edit Port — selects VTR Edit Port (7 through 12) for Auto Edit
parameter adjustment.
select the desired port, then press TAKE.
■ User Channel — assigns a channel (ChA through ChH) to control

the VTR connected to the selected VTR Edit Port when performing
Auto Edit operations.
select the desired channel, then press TAKE.
■ VTR Audio Trks — sets the audio tracks for the VTR connected to
the selected VTR Edit Port. When a VTR is the “recorder” during
Auto Edit operations, the VTR Audio Trks parameter selects which
3-25
audio tracks (digital or analog) to use for recording the input audio
on the VTR. Applies only to digital VTRs.
• Digital — sets the VTR to record audio onto the digital audio
tracks.
• Analog — sets the VTR to record audio onto the analog audio
tracks.
select the desired audio input, then press TAKE.
■ Clip Preroll — sets the Clip Preroll time for the Abekas 6000 during
an Auto Edit event.
the desired value or type a value into the numeric keypad. Press
TAKE to set the value.
• Range = 0.00 to 10.00

■ Clip Edit Delay — sets an offset to the Abekas 6000 In Point
timecode value during an Auto Edit event, to ensure edit accuracy
on the Abekas 6000 (Abekas 6000 = Recorder). For example, if the
Abekas 6000 In Point is set to 1.00.00.00 (field 1), but it records at
1:00:00:00 (field 2), an offset of -1 field is entered with Clip Edit
Delay to ensure the edit happens exactly at the proper recorder In
Point of 1.00.00.00 (field 1).
• Range = -50 to +50 fields

■ Src VTR Delay — sets an offset to the source (VTR) In and Out
Points during an Auto Edit event, to establish relative
synchronization between the source (VTR) and the recorder (Abekas
6000). For example, if your source In Point is 00.00.00.00 and the
first field of source video recorded to the Abekas 6000 is 00.00.00.01,
there is a one frame offset in relative synchronization between the
source (VTR) and the recorder (Abekas 6000). In this case, a -2 field
(1 frame) value can be entered with Src VTR Delay to correct the
offset. Now, when the edit is performed, the first field of video
recorded on the recorder will be source timecode 00.00.00.00.
3-26
Status Overlay

■ Postroll — sets the Abekas 6000 and VTR postroll time during an
Auto Edit event.
• Range = 0.00 to 10.00

■ VTR Preroll — sets the VTR Preroll time during an Auto Edit event.
3
• Range = 0.00 to 10.00

■ VTR Edit Delay — sets an offset to the VTR In Point timecode
value during an Auto Edit event, to ensure edit accuracy on the VTR
(VTR = Recorder).
For example, if the VTR In Point is set to 1.00.00.00 (field 1), but it
records at 1:00:00:00 (field 2), an offset of -1 field is entered with
VTR Edit Delay to ensure the edit happens exactly at the proper
recorder In Point of 1.00.00.00 (field 1).

■ Src Clip Delay — sets an offset to the source (Abekas 6000) In and
Out Points, during an Auto Edit event, to establish relative
synchronization between the source (Abekas 6000) and the recorder
(VTR).
For example, if your source In Point is 00.00.00.00 and the first field
of source video recorded to the Abekas 6000 is 00.00.00.01, there is
a one frame offset in relative synchronization between the source
(Abekas 6000) and the recorder (VTR). In this case, a -2 field (1
3-27
frame) value can be entered with Src Clip Delay to correct the off-
set. Now, when the edit is performed, the first field of video
recorded on the recorder will be source timecode 00.00.00.00.

■ Jog Method — sets the Jog Method used when jogging a VTR from
the Abekas 6000 control panel.
• Use varplay — sends varplay commands when jogging a VTR
from the Abekas 6000 control panel.
• Use search — sends search commands when jogging a VTR from
the desired value. Press TAKE to set the value.
• Default = Use varplay

■ Jog Speed — sets the Jog Speed sent to the VTR when jogging from
• Default = 0.00
• Range = -60.00 to +60.00
■ Jog Duration — sets the Jog Duration (length of varplay or search
command) used when jogging a VTR from the Abekas 6000 control
panel.
• Default = 00.00.04
• Range = 00.00.01 to 1.00.00.00
3-28
Status Overlay
REMOTE TIMING SETUP Menu

The REMOTE TIMING SETUP menu is used to set Abekas 6000 timing
when controlled by an external device via Sony, Odetics, or Louth pro-
tocol. Parameter adjustment is similar to AUTO EDIT SETUP, except
that all entries are based on the User Channel (instead of Port).
From the HOME MENU, highlight REMOTE TIMING SETUP using the
REMOTE TIMING SETUP (1/6)

>Slave Port = [1]
User Channel = ChA
TC Field Report = OFF 3
(EXIT)
■ Slave Port — displays the RS422 port assigned to the user channel
(ChA through ChH).
The Abekas 6000 follows a one-to-one port/channel mapping for

“sony-slave” or “odetics” protocol. For example, an Odetics automa-
tion system connected to RS422 Port#1 would control ChA
(Port#2=ChB, Port#3=ChC, etc.).
select the desired port, then press TAKE.
■ User Channel — selects a channel (ChA through ChH) to be

adjusted in this menu. Only existing channels can be selected. The
Slave Port value (which is read-only) is updated accordingly when
User Channel is changed.
select the desired channel, then press TAKE.
■ TC Field Report — Enables/disables the use of the field bit in the

RS422 timecode data stream. This allows an external controller to
distinguish between field 1 or field 2 timecode values. Set this
3-29
parameter according to the requirements of the external controlling

device.
■ Clip Edit Delay — sets an offset to the In Point timecode value,

during an edit event, to ensure edit accuracy on the Abekas 6000
(Abekas 6000 = Recorder) when being controlled from an external
edit controller.
For example, if the Abekas 6000 In Point is set to 1.00.00.00 (field

1), but it records at 1:00:00:00 (field 2), an offset of -1 field could be
entered with Clip Edit Delay to ensure the edit happens exactly at
the proper recorder In Point of 1.00.00.00 (field 1).
• Default = 8 fields
■ Src Clip Delay — sets an offset to the source (Abekas 6000) In and
Out Points, during an edit event, to establish relative
synchronization between the source (Abekas 6000) and the recorder
when being controlled from an external edit controller.
For example, if your source In Point is 00.00.00.00 and the first field
of source video recorded to the Abekas 6000 is 00.00.00.01, there is
a one frame offset in relative synchronization between the source
(Abekas 6000) and the recorder. In this case, a -2 field (1 frame)
value can be entered with Src Clip Delay to correct the offset.
Now, when the edit is performed, the first field of video recorded
on the recorder will be source timecode 00.00.00.00.
3-30
Status Overlay
PANEL SETUP Menu

The PANEL SETUP menu contains “user preference” parameters for the
Abekas 6000 Control Panel currently in use.
From the HOME MENU, highlight PANEL SETUP using the rotary knob
and press TAKE.
PANEL SETUP (1/2)

>TC Threshold = 100
(EXIT)
■ TC Threshold — sets a threshold value that toggles a numeric

keypad entry between absolute frames notation and timecode
notation.
When entering values, the timecode entry threshold sets the cross-
over point. Values equal to or greater than the threshold are shown
as timecode. Values less than the threshold are shown as frames.
Highlight TC Threshold with the rotary knob and press TAKE.

numeric keypad. Press TAKE to set the threshold value.
• Default = 100
3-31
GPI SETUP Menu

The GPI SETUP menu is used to assign which channels are sending or
receiving GPI triggers and which functions are being performed when
those GPI signals are sent or received on a particular channel.
From the HOME MENU, highlight GPI SETUP using the rotary knob
and press TAKE.
GPI SETUP (1/4)

>GPI IN ASSIGN
GPI OUT ASSIGN
GPI Enable = ON
(EXIT)
■ GPI IN ASSIGN — selects the GPI IN ASSIGN sub-menu.
Highlight GPI IN ASSIGN using the rotary knob and press TAKE to
enter the sub-menu.
■ GPI OUT ASSIGN — selects the GPI OUT ASSIGN sub-menu.
Highlight GPI IN ASSIGN using the rotary knob and press TAKE to
enter the sub-menu.
■ GPI Enable — sets GPI ENABLE to ON or OFF. When ON, GPI

Inputs and Outputs are active.
3-32
Status Overlay
GPI IN ASSIGN Sub-Menu

This menu is used to assign a Channel and Mode to GPI Inputs (1
through 16). Turning the rotary knob clockwise moves the highlight
from the CHANNEL column, to the MODE column, then down to the
next GPI Input.
To assign a Channel and Mode for a given GPI Input, highlight the
CHANNEL column for the desired GPI Input then press TAKE. Rotate
the knob to select a channel and press TAKE to accept the selection.
With the rotary knob, move the highlight to the MODE column and
press TAKE. Rotate the knob to select the desired mode for that GPI
Input, then press TAKE to accept the selection. Use the same proce-
dure to assign a Channel and Mode to other GPI Inputs.
3
Note: Refer to the Abekas 6000 Operations manual for a complete listing and descrip-
tion of the GPI Input functions.
GPI IN ASSIGN (1/33)

GPI CHANNEL MODE
>1 ChA Play >
2 None Off
3 None Off
4 None Off
5 None Off
6 None Off
7 None Off
8 None Off
9 None Off
10 None Off
11 None Off
12 None Off
13 None Off
14 None Off
15 None Off
16 None Off
(EXIT)
3-33
GPI OUT ASSIGN Sub-Menu

This menu is used to assign a Channel, Mode, and Timecode start time
to GPI Outputs (1 through 12). Turning the knob clockwise moves the
highlight from the CHANNEL column, to the MODE column, to the
Timecode column, then down to the next GPI Output.
To assign a Channel and Mode for a given GPI Output, highlight the
CHANNEL column for the desired GPI Output then press TAKE. Rotate
the knob to select a channel and press TAKE to accept the selection.
With the rotary knob, move the highlight to the MODE column and
press TAKE. Rotate the knob to select the desired mode for that GPI
Output, then press TAKE to accept the selection.
If the “Timecode” mode is selected, rotate the knob to highlight the

Timecode column for the given GPI Output and press TAKE. Enter a
timecode value with the numeric keypad and press TAKE to accept the
value. Use the same procedure to assign a Channel, Mode, and Time-
code start time to other GPI Outputs.
Note: Refer to the Abekas 6000 Operations manual for a complete listing and descrip-
tion of the GPI Output functions.
GPI OUT ASSIGN (1/33)

GPI CHNL MODE Timecode
>1 ChA Timecode 00.00.01.00
2 ChB Clip Start N/A
3 None Off N/A
4 None Off N/A
5 None Off N/A
6 None Off N/A
7 None Off N/A
8 None Off N/A
9 None Off N/A
10 None Off N/A
11 None Off N/A
12 None Off N/A
(EXIT)
3-34
Status Overlay
DIAGNOSTICS Menu
The DIAGNOSTICS Menu is used to monitor the status of various Abe-
kas 6000 hardware sub-assemblies. Monitor sub-menus are provided to
display specific diagnostic data reported back from the Abekas 6000
system. Technicians can monitor the Abekas 6000 hardware status and
are notified immediately when conditions are out of range or if there
are failures with a hardware sub-assembly.
From the HOME MENU, highlight DIAGNOSTICS using the rotary knob
and press TAKE.
DIAGNOSTICS (1/6)
>TEMPERATURE MONITOR 3
DISK ARRAY MONITOR
FANS MONITOR
POWER SUPPLY MONITOR
CHANNEL CONTROLLERS
(EXIT)
■ TEMPERATURE MONITOR — selects the TEMPERATURE

MONITOR sub-menu.
■ DISK ARRAY MONITOR — selects the DISK ARRAY MONITOR
sub-menu.
■ FANS MONITOR — selects the FANS MONITOR sub-menu.
■ POWER SUPPLY MONITOR — selects the POWER SUPPLY
MONITOR sub-menu.
■ CHANNEL CONTROLLERS — selects the CHANNEL
CONTROLLERS sub-menu.
3-35
TEMPERATURE MONITOR Sub-Menu
TEMPERATURE MONITOR (1/6)

>Chassis Select = Main
Present = YES
In Range = YES
Temperature = +095.2ºF
Displayed Temp = Fahrenheit
(EXIT)
This diagnostic menu displays the Temperature status of the sub-

assemblies in the Abekas 6000 main chassis and disk expansion chas-
sis’ (if any).
■ Chassis Select — selects the Abekas 6000 chassis (Main or Disk

Expansion 1-2) to monitor.
select the desired chassis to monitor, then press TAKE.
• Main — selects the Abekas 6000 main chassis

• EX-1 — selects disk expansion chassis #1
■ Present — indicates if selected chassis is present.
• YES — selected chassis is present
• NO — selected chassis is not present
■ In Range — indicates if selected chassis temperature is within
proper operating range.
• YES — indicates that selected chassis temperature is in proper
range.
• HIGH (!) — indicates that selected chassis temperature is High,
above proper range.
• LOW (!) — indicates that selected chassis temperature is Low,
below proper range.
3-36
Status Overlay
• FAIL (!) — indicates that selected chassis temperature is far out of

range and the Abekas 6000 should be shut down, or external cool-
ing methods should be employed.
■ Temperature — displays the temperature of the selected chassis in
Celsius or Fahrenheit according to the Displayed Temp setting.
■ Displayed Temp — sets the Temperature display to Celsius or
Fahrenheit.
select the desired temperature display, then press TAKE.
• Celsius — sets temperature display to Celsius.

• Fahrenheit — sets temperature display to Fahrenheit. 3
3-37
DISK ARRAY MONITOR Sub-Menu
DISK ARRAY MONITOR (1/3)

>Chassis Select = Main Chassis
Present = YES
(EXIT)
This diagnostic menu displays the Disk Array Drive status in the Abe-
kas 6000 main chassis and disk expansion chassis’ (if any).


■ Present — indicates if the selected chassis is present or not.
• YES — Selected chassis is present.
• NO — Selected chassis is not present.
3-38
Status Overlay
FANS MONITOR Sub-Menu
FANS MONITOR (1/3)

>Chassis Select = Main Chassis
Present = YES
(EXIT)
-------FANS ARRAY STATUS------

01=Good 02=Good 03=Good 04=Good
05=Good 06=Good 07=Good 08=Good
3
This diagnostic menu displays the Fan Array Status in the Abekas 6000
main chassis and disk expansion chassis’ (if any).


■ FANS ARRAY STATUS — indicates operating status of cooling Fans
(1 through 8).
• Good — indicates Fan is in good condition.
• FAIL — indicates Fan has failed.
• Low — indicates Fan is spinning slower than normal.
• (Chassis not Present) — indicates selected chassis is not present.
3-39
POWER SUPPLY MONITOR Sub-Menu
POWER SUPPLY MONITOR (1/11)

>Chassis Select = Main-A
Present = YES
In Range = YES
Drives-A +12V = GOOD
Drives-B +12V = GOOD
Drives-All +5V = GOOD
MotherBrd -12V = GOOD
MotherBrd +12V = GOOD
(EXIT)
This diagnostic menu displays the Power Supply voltages status in the
Abekas 6000 main chassis and disk expansion chassis’ (if any).


■ In Range — indicates if selected chassis power supply voltage is
within proper operating range.
• YES — indicates that selected chassis power supply voltage is in
proper range.
• NO (!) — indicates that selected chassis power supply voltage is
not in proper range.
Power is distributed from multiple circuits to the Disk Array Drives and
Motherboard with different voltages. The power circuits status can be
displayed as GOOD, HIGH (!), LOW (!), or FAILED (!). The power sup-
ply module should be serviced or replaced if any power circuit is dis-
3-40
Status Overlay
playing a status of HIGH (!), LOW (!), or FAILED (!). Be sure to turn the
main circuit breaker OFF on the affected power supply unit before
removing or inserting the power supply unit.
CHANNEL CONTROLLERS Sub-Menu
CHANNEL CONTROLLERS (1/1)

>(EXIT)
Ch Device Port
A Panel 13
B Panel 13 3
C Panel 13
D Panel 13
E None
F None
G None
H None
This diagnostic menu displays which RS422 Port and Device has con-
trol over each channel (ChA through ChH). This menu is a status menu
only. No parameters can be changed in this menu.
■ Ch — column displays each Abekas 6000 video Channel (ChA

through ChH).
■ Device — column displays the external Device controlling the
channel.
■ Port — column displays the RS422 Serial Port (1 through 13)
assigned to the video channel.
3-41
USER SETUP SAVE/RECALL Menu

From the HOME MENU, highlight USER SETUP SAVE/RECALL using the
USER SETUP SAVE/RECALL (1/4)

>Settings = User-1
Save Settings = Ready
Recall Settings = Ready
(EXIT)
■ Settings — allows you to select one of four user memory locations

to save and recall USER SETUP menu settings. Factory default
settings are also available for recall.
Highlight Settings with the rotary knob and press TAKE. Rotate the
knob to select the desired user memory location or factory default,
then press TAKE.
• Factory — selects the factory default USER SETUP settings (for

recall only).
• User-1 thru User-4 — selects one of four user memory locations to
save and recall settings.
■ Save Settings — Saves all user-changeable setup parameters
within the Abekas 6000 HOME MENU into the selected memory
location (User-1 thru 4).
To save your settings, highlight Save Settings using the rotary knob
and press TAKE. The Save Settings status changes from “Ready” to
“SAVED”. The status reverts to “Ready” when the highlight is moved
or if you exit and return to this menu.
Note: You cannot save current settings to the “Factory” setting. The “Factory” setting is
for recall only.
3-42
Status Overlay
■ Recall Settings — Used to recall previously saved USER SETUP

settings from the selected memory location (User-1 thru 4 or
Factory).
To recall settings, highlight Recall Settings using the rotary knob

and press TAKE. The Recall Settings status changes from “Ready”
to “RECALLED”. The status reverts to “Ready” when the highlight is
moved or if you exit and return to this menu.
Note: The User Setup configuration stored in “User-1” memory location is automati-
cally loaded whenever the Abekas 6000 is power up or rebooted. 3
3-43
3-44
Quick Contents
Section 4:
• Getting Started
• Power Up and Down
Getting Started
Procedures
• Channel Acquisition and
Selection
• System Configuration
• Saving and Recalling User
Setups
Getting Started
This section covers the simple steps necessary for getting up and run-
ning on the Abekas 6000 server system before recording and playing
back clips.
• Power Up and Down Procedures

• Channel Acquisition and Selection
• System Configuration
• Saving and Recalling User Setups
4-2
Power Up and Down Procedures
Power Up and Down Procedures

This section assumes the Abekas 6000 server is already installed cor-
rectly: power has already been connected, all video and audio inputs
connected, reference video input connected, and any other ancillary
units, such as a VTR are properly connected. Please refer to the Abekas
6000 Installation guide for system interconnection information.
Power Up
When power to the Abekas 6000 main chassis is off, the numeric dis-
play on the Control Panel will read as follows:
Network
RS422 Remote
4
Use the following steps to power up the Abekas 6000 system. If your
system has one or two Disk Expansion chassis’, they should be pow-
ered ON before the main chassis.
1. Open the hinged cover on the front of the chassis. Turn the system
power ON by pressing the "I" portion of the POWER switch on the
main power supply located in the lower left corner of the chassis.
OFF ON OFF ON
I I
2. If your Abekas 6000 system is equipped with a redundant power

supply (located to the right of the main power supply), turn it ON in
the same manner.
During Power Up the CPU RESET and ERROR LEDs on the front of the
main chassis will be ON. When the Power Up sequence is complete,
4-3
the CPU RESET and ERROR LEDs will go OFF and the four System Sta-
tus LEDs on the main chassis will be ON (green) as shown below:
TEMPERATURE
FANS
DISK ARRAY
POWER SUPPLY
CPU RESET
ERROR
The System Diagnostics LED on the control panel will also be green
indicating normal operation. The control panel will be activated and
the SMPTE bars test pattern selected for output on all video channels.
Power Down
Use the following steps to power down the Abekas 6000 system. If you
have one or two Disk Expansion chassis’, turn off the main server chas-
sis first, then turn off the Disk Expansion chassis’.
1. Make sure all User Menu settings have been saved (see Saving and
Recalling User Setups). Notify other operators working with the sys-
tem prior to powering down the Abekas 6000.
2. Turn the Abekas 6000 power OFF by pressing "O" portion of the
POWER switch on the main power supply located in the lower left
corner of the chassis. If your Abekas 6000 system is equipped with a
redundant power supply (located to the right of the main power
supply), turn it OFF in the same manner.
4-4
Channel Acquisition and Selection

Before any operation can be performed on the Abekas 6000, at least
one channel must be acquired. This section describes how to acquire
and select channels using the ten “Channel Select / Function Softkey”
buttons Ch A through Ch H, GROUP and All Ch.
Topics covered include:

• Channel Select LED Color Code
• Single & Multi-Channel Operation
• Grouping Channels / Synchronized Operation
Ch A Ch B
F1 F6
F2
Ch C Ch D
F7 Exit 4
Ch E Ch F
F3 F8 Shift
Ch G Ch H
F4 F9 Menu
GROUP ALL Ch
F5 F10
■ In Clip Play mode, these ten buttons act as “Channel Select” buttons.
■ In List Play mode, these buttons act as “Function Softkeys”, utilizing
the indicators printed on the overlay label (F1 through F10).
Channel Select LED Color Code

The tri-colored LEDs below each Channel Select button use the follow-
ing color codes:
• OFF Channel is not yet acquired by any control

panel, and is available to be acquired by this
control panel or any other control panel that is
currently connected to the Abekas 6000.
• GREEN (Bright) Channel is already acquired by this control
panel, and is actively selected for use on this
control panel. The channel letter associated with
4-5
this “Ch” button also appears in the “Ch” indica-

tor to the left of the “Clip ID” at the top of the
control panel. Any other control panel that is
currently connected to the Abekas 6000 cannot
acquire this channel. If two or more channels
have been grouped together, the Bright GREEN
intensity indicates that the channel is the “mas-
ter” channel. If two channels are linked together
as a Video+Key pair, then whenever this chan-
nel pair is selected, the LED in both “Ch” but-
tons is set to Bright GREEN.
• GREEN (Dim) Channel is already acquired by this control
panel, and is actively selected for use on this
control panel, and is associated with a group of
channels (this is a “slave” to a group of chan-
nels). This channel letter does not appear in the
“Ch” indicator to the left of the “Clip ID” at the
top of the control panel. Rather, the “master”
channel associated with this channel is shown.
Any other control panel that is currently con-
nected to the Abekas 6000 cannot acquire this
channel.
• YELLOW (Bright) Channel is already acquired by this control
panel, but the given channel is not actively
selected for use on this control panel. Any other
control panel that is currently connected to the
Abekas 6000 cannot acquire this channel. The
bright intensity indicates that the channel is part
of a group of channels. The LED on the GROUP
button will also have its LED set to Bright YEL-
LOW if two or more of the “Ch” buttons have
their LED set to Bright YELLOW.
• YELLOW (Dim) Channel is already acquired by this control
panel, but the given channel is not actively
selected for use on this control panel. Any other
control panel that is currently connected to the
Abekas 6000 cannot acquire this channel. The
dim intensity indicates that the channel is not a
part of a group of channels.
• RED (Bright) In List Play mode, the Channel Select LEDs turn
bright red to indicate they are Function Softkeys
to be used in conjunction with List Play menu
4-6
items. Notice that all 10 LEDs are illuminated,

which is further indication that the function soft-
keys are active.
• RED (Dim) Channel is not available to be acquired by this
control panel, since it's acquired by another con-
trol panel that is currently connected to the Abe-
kas 6000.
Single & Multi-Channel Operation

Depending on the number of channels in your Abekas 6000 system (up
to eight) you can acquire a single channel or multiple channels for
operation from the primary control panel. If additional control panels
have been connected, other operators can also acquire and operate
available channels on the Abekas 6000 from their control panels. The
Status LEDs under the Channel Select buttons indicate whether a chan-
nel has been acquired, selected, or is in use by another control panel. 4
See Channel Select LED Color Code on page 4-5 for more detailed infor-
mation on the LED color codes.
Acquiring a Channel
Press and hold down the Shift button followed by a press of the given
“Ch” button (Ch A through Ch H) that has its LED turned OFF. Upon
releasing the “Ch” button, the LED changes from OFF to Bright GREEN,
with the given channel acquired and selected for active use.
Releasing a Channel
Press and hold down the Exit button, followed by a press of the given
channel button that has its LED set to YELLOW or GREEN (Ch A
through Ch H). Upon releasing the “Ch” button, the LED changes to
OFF, and the given channel is released.
Actions to All Channels

The All Ch button may be used to act upon all available channels. For
example, when acquiring channels, press Shift + All Ch. This action
acquires all channels that are available to be acquired. Be aware that
any channel that's already acquired by another control panel is not
acquired by this panel during this operation.
To release all channels from this control panel, press Exit + All Ch.
This action releases all acquired channels. Channels that are acquired
4-7
by other control panels or by station automation equipment are not

affected by this operation.
Selecting an Acquired Channel

With multiple channels already acquired, simply press the Channel
Select button for the channel you want to select (ChA through ChH).
The LED under the selected channel will turn Bright GREEN indicating
it is active, and the LED under the previously selected channel will turn
to YELLOW to indicate it is acquired but not active.
Note: Channels acquired by other control panels or by station automation equipment

cannot be selected. Once a channel is released by another control panel, it can be
acquired and selected.
Grouping Channels / Synchronized Operation

For purposes of synchronized clip playback, two or more video chan-
nels that have been acquired by the control panel may be grouped
together. If two channels had previously been paired together for
Video+Key and then acquired, then that channel pair is automatically
joined to the group as a pair of channels. See Video+Key on page 4-14
for more information.
Placing Channels into a Group

To select multiple channels for “grouped” synchronized control, first
acquire the desired channels according to the acquiring process
described previously in Acquiring a Channel. Then press and hold
down the GROUP button, followed by a press of the given channel
button which has its LED turned to Dim YELLOW (ChA through ChH).
Upon releasing the “Ch” button, any LED previously set to Dim YEL-
LOW now changes to Bright GREEN, and the given channel is selected
for active use. This channel is now grouped with any channel that had
its LED set to GREEN. This process may then be repeated with any
other acquired channel that has its LED set to Dim YELLOW.
Selecting the Group

After at least two channels have been grouped together, the LED for
the GROUP button will be either Bright and Dim GREEN (if the group
4-8
is currently selected) or Bright YELLOW (if the group is not currently

selected). The group may be selected by either pressing the GROUP
button itself or any of the “Ch” buttons that are contained in the group.
Master / Slave Channels

During grouped operation, only one of the channel select buttons (Ch
A through Ch H) within the group has its LED set to “Bright GREEN” at
any given time. Bright GREEN indicates that this channel is the “pri-
mary” or “master” channel of the group. While the group is selected,
the other channels that are part of the group have their LEDs set to
“Dim GREEN”. These are the “secondary” or “slave” channels.
Changing Slave to Master

Channels that are acquired and set as “slave channels” (Dim GREEN)
during grouped operation can be made into the “master channel” by
simply pressing and releasing the given “Ch” select button. If the given
“Ch” button happens to be the “Key” portion of a “Video+Key” pair,
4
then the “Video” channel becomes the “master” channel  even
though the LEDs for both the Video and Key channels are lit “Bright
GREEN”.
Transport Control of a Group

While the Group of channels is selected, all transport control functions
(with a few exceptions) act upon all of the grouped channels at the
same time. The clip that has the longest duration acts as the timeline
for the entire group of clips. During play operations, the clip or clips
that have shorter durations simply stop at the end of their own time-
lines.
The following transport control buttons only act upon the “master”
(Bright GREEN) channel or the “master” Video+Key channel pair.
■ CLIP ID
■ (Previous Clip ID)

■ (Next Clip ID)
REC
■
REC
■ Shift
+ = Toggle Clip ID Lock (changed with Shift + REC)
4-9
Removing a Channel from a Group

Press & hold the GROUP button and then press the desired channel
button that is part of the group. For example, if ChA, ChB and ChC are
all grouped together and ChA needs to be removed from the group:
press & hold the GROUP button (which actively selects the group of
channels) and then press the Ch A button. This combined action
removes ChA from the group, and selects ChB as the active “master”
channel of the groupsince it's the next-highest order channel remain-
ing in the group. Therefore, the LEDs for Ch B and the GROUP but-
tons are set to Bright GREEN, while the LED for Ch C is set to Dim
GREEN. The LED for the Ch A button is set to Dim YELLOW since ChA
is still acquired by the control panel.
Removing & Releasing a Channel from a Group

Press & hold the Exit button and then press the desired channel button
that is part of the group. For example, if ChA, ChB and ChC are all
grouped together and ChA needs to be removed from the group and
released from the control panel: press Exit + Ch A. This action
removes ChA from the group and releases this channel from the con-
trol panel. ChB is made into the active “master” channel of the
groupsince it's the next-highest order channel remaining in the
group. The LED for the Ch A button is turned OFFsince it was
released from the control panel. The status of the ChB and ChC LEDs is
determined by whether the group was selected at the time ChA was
released. If the group was selected at the time, then their LEDs would
be a combination of Bright and Dim GREEN. If the group was not
selected at the time, then their LEDs would be Bright YELLOW.
Placing All Channels into a Group

To place all acquired channels into a group, press GROUP + All Ch.
Any channels that have been acquired by the control panel and are not
yet part of the group will be placed into the group. This operation
assumes there is at least one acquired channel that is not yet part of the
group. Otherwise, if all acquired channels are already a part of the
group, then all channels will be ungrouped.
Removing All Channels from a Group

To ungroup all channels that are contained in a group, press GROUP +
All Ch. This operation assumes that all channels that have been
acquired by the control panel are already included in the group. All
channels that are part of the group are removed from the group. The
highest-order “Ch” button that is acquired by the control panel is auto-
4-10
matically selected as the active channel, with its LED is set to Bright
GREEN.
Removing & Releasing All Channels from a Group

To release all channels contained in the group from acquisition, and to
cancel the group itself, press Exit + GROUP. This action will simulta-
neously ungroup the channels and release them from the given control
panel. The LEDs of these “Ch” buttons will all turn OFF, including the
LED for the GROUP button. The highest-order “Ch” button that
remains acquired by the control panel is automatically selected as the
active channel, with its LED is set to Bright GREEN.
4-11
System Configuration
Before making any new recordings on the Abekas 6000, it is important
to verify the system configuration defaults and modify them, if neces-
sary, for your particular working requirements.
This section covers two essential system configuration parameters:
• Channel Configuration
• Record Format
Channel Configuration
Channels are configured in pairs (one pair per VIDEO card installed in
the Abekas 6000 chassis). The Abekas 6000 channel pairs can be con-
figured in three different ways:
• Video/Video
• Video+Key
• Time Delay
Video/Video
The default channel pair configuration is Video/Video. In the Video/
Video configuration, each channel can be acquired and operated inde-
pendently of each other. The same or different input video sources can
be fed to each channel’s video input.
4-12
■ To verify a channel pair is configured for Video/Video:

1. Press Menu to bring up the HOME MENU display on the status
overlay output. The Exit button may need to be pressed once or
twice to return to the HOME menu.
CHANNEL CONFIG
>SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
RS422 PORT ASSIGN
AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
2. Highlight SYSTEM SETUP with the knob and press TAKE to enter 4
the sub-menu.
Look at the four “Chnl X/X tracks” parameters and verify your chan-
nel’s current configuration.
SYSTEM SETUP (1/9)

>Video Standard = 525
Chnl A/B tracks = Video/Video
Net Delete = OFF
VIDEO TIMING
AUDIO SETUP
(EXIT)
■ To configure a channel pair (Ch A/B) for Video/Video:

1. In the SYSTEM SETUP menu, highlight Ch A/B Tracks with the
2. Rotate the knob counter-clockwise to select Video/Video and press
TAKE to accept the selection. When the channel pair configuration
is changed, clips currently cued on the respective channels are
released and black (Test Pattern “0”) is selected on both channels.
4-13
3. Press Menu to remove the User Menu from the status overlay, if
desired.
Video+Key
If desired, the Abekas 6000 provides the ability to attach a “key” chan-
nel to a video channel that will simultaneously record and playback a
key signal associated with the video signal. This requires a pair of
channels, one for the “master” video signal and one for the “slave” key
signal. You have the choice of defining which channel pairs are
assigned as “Video+Key” pairs.
Once the pair is configured as “Video+Key”, whenever the video chan-
nel is acquired the key channel is automatically acquired with it. When
any transport function is performed, the key channel is locked in sync
with the video channel. Before making Video+Key recordings, make
sure the proper video and key signals are fed to the video and key
channel inputs. Also, the proper video and key elements must be
enabled for recording by toggling the V and K buttons on the control
panel.
Note: In the Video+Key configuration, the Key channel records “luminance only”
information from the input video signal.
In a fully-loaded Abekas 6000 server, only the following channels may

be paired for Video+Key operation:
■ Ch A + Ch B
■ Ch C + Ch D
■ Ch E + Ch F
■ Ch G + Ch H
No other combinations of channels may be paired together as a
Video+Key pair.
4-14
■ To configure a channel pair (Ch A/B) for Video+Key:

CHANNEL CONFIG
>SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
RS422 PORT ASSIGN
AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
2. Highlight SYSTEM SETUP with the knob and press TAKE to enter 4
the sub-menu.
3. Highlight Ch A/B Tracks with the knob and press TAKE.
SYSTEM SETUP (2/9)
Video Standard = 525
>Chnl A/B tracks = Video+Key
Net Delete = OFF
VIDEO TIMING
AUDIO SETUP
(EXIT)
4. Use the knob to select Video+Key and press TAKE to accept the
selection. When the channel pair configuration is changed, clips cur-
rently cued on the respective channels are released and black (Test
Pattern “0”) is selected on both channels.
desired.
4-15
Time Delay
The Time Delay configuration sets a channel pair, for example ChA/
ChB, to Time Delay mode. This provides the ability to record input
video on the “master” channel (ChA) and play it back using a set delay
time on the “slave” channel (ChB).
This requires a pair of channels, one for the “master” record channel
and one for the “slave” playback channel. You have the choice of
defining which channel pairs are assigned as “Time Delay” pairs.
Once the pair is configured as “Time Delay”, normal operations can be
performed with the “master” channel (ChA) but the “slave” channel
(ChB) is locked out of normal operations and dedicated to playback
only. Refer to Section 7: Time Delay for more information on Time
Delay mode operations.
In a fully-loaded Abekas 6000 server, only the following channels may
be paired for Time Delay operation:
■ Ch A + Ch B
■ Ch C + Ch D
■ Ch E + Ch F
■ Ch G + Ch H
No other combinations of channels may be paired together as a Time
Delay pair.
■ To configure a channel pair (Ch A/B) for Time Delay:

CHANNEL CONFIG
>SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
RS422 PORT ASSIGN
AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
4-16
2. Highlight SYSTEM SETUP with the knob and press TAKE to enter
the sub-menu.
3. Highlight Ch A/B Tracks with the knob and press TAKE.
SYSTEM SETUP (2/9)
>Chnl A/B tracks = Time Delay
Net Delete = OFF
VIDEO TIMING
AUDIO SETUP
(EXIT)
4. Rotate the knob clockwise to select Time Delay and press TAKE to
accept the selection. When the channel pair configuration is 4
changed, clips currently cued on the respective channels are
released and black (Test Pattern “0”) is selected on both channels.
desired.
Record Format
The Video and Key Record Format needs to be set or verified before
making new recordings. The Record Format selects between two avail-
able compression formats, DVCPRO and DVCPRO-50. DVCPRO format
records video at 25Mb/s (4:1:1) providing seven hours of storage on a
standard Abekas 6000 system, and DVCPRO-50 format records video at
50Mb/s (4:2:2) providing three and a half hours of storage on a stan-
dard system. Select a record format that best suits your image quality
and disk space usage requirements.
4-17
■ To change the Video and Key Record Formats:

>CHANNEL CONFIG
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
RS422 PORT ASSIGN
AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
2. Highlight CHANNEL CONFIG with the knob and press TAKE to
enter the sub-menu.
3. Highlight User Channel with the knob and press TAKE.
CHANNEL CONFIG (1/8)
>User Channel = ChA
Record DV25/50 = DV50
Open-ended limit = 00.10.00.00
Handle Duration = 00.00.10.00
Handle Enable = ON
Remote New Trks = V--
Remote V Enable = V-
(EXIT)
4. Rotate the knob to select the current channel, then press TAKE to
5. Highlight Record DV25/50 with the knob and press TAKE.
6. Rotate the knob to select the desired Video and Key Record Format,
desired.
4-18
Saving and Recalling User Setups
Saving and Recalling User Setups

After configuring your system with the user menu settings, you must
save them to memory, otherwise they will be lost when the system is
powered down or rebooted. A User Setup consists of:
• All User Menu parameter settings

• Channels acquired by each control panel connected to the Abekas
6000
The Abekas 6000 provides the ability to save and recall User Setups to
memory in the USER SETUP SAVE/RECALL menu. This menu allows
you to select one of four user memory locations for USER SETUP menu
settings. Factory default menu settings are also available for recall only.
By saving up to four standard User Setup configurations, an operator

can sit down at any control panel connected to the Abekas 6000 and
quickly reconfigure the system to familiar settings.
4
Note: The User Setup configuration stored in “User-1” memory location is automati-
cally loaded whenever the Abekas 6000 is power up or rebooted.
■ To save the current User Setup:

1. From the HOME MENU, highlight USER SETUP SAVE/RECALL using
the knob and press TAKE.

>Settings = User-1
(EXIT)
4-19
2. Highlight Settings with the knob and press TAKE. Rotate the knob
to select the desired user memory location (User-1 thru User-4) you
would like to save to, then press TAKE.
3. Highlight Save Settings with the knob and press TAKE. The Save
Settings status changes from “Ready” to “SAVED”. The status reverts
to “Ready” when the highlight is moved or if you exit and return to
this menu.
Note: You cannot save current settings to the “Factory” setting. The “Factory” setting is
for recall only.
■ To recall a User Setup or Factory Default:

1. From the HOME MENU, highlight USER SETUP SAVE/RECALL using
the knob and press TAKE.

>Settings = User-1
(EXIT)
2. Highlight Settings with the knob and press TAKE. Rotate the knob
to select the desired user memory location (User-1 thru User-4 or
factory default) you would like to recall, then press TAKE.
3. Then highlight Recall Settings with the knob and press TAKE. The
Recall Settings status changes from “Ready” to “RECALLED”. The
status reverts to “Ready” when the highlight is moved or if you exit
and return to this menu.
4-20
Quick Contents
Section 5:
• Overview
• Clip Recording Prerequisites
Clip Recording and
• Recording Clips Playback
• Numeric Entry
• Cueing and Playing Clips
Overview
This section describes in detail the control panel operations necessary
to record and playback clips on the Abekas 6000 server.
This section is divided into the following parts:
• Clip Recording Prerequisites

• Recording Clips
• Numeric Entry
• Cueing and Playing Clips
Clip Concept
Recordings made on the Abekas 6000 are called “clips”. A clip is a real-
time video, key, and audio segment of any length stored in the Abekas
6000. A clip of one frame duration is referred to as a still. A clip con-
sists of one to three elements, the elements being Video, Key, and
Audio. This definition of a clip constitutes the foundation of all Abekas
6000 features.
Every clip in a Abekas 6000 server network has a unique ID number

regardless of the server it resides in. Clips can also have full titles that
include their description title, project name, owner name, etc.
A pre-determined record duration is always necessary when recording

a clip. You can use the current record duration or assign a new dura-
tion before recording a clip.
Clips are recorded on the disk in a non-linear manner and start at the
next available disk location (which is automatically determined by the
Abekas 6000). A clip recording ends when the assigned record dura-
tion is reached, or when you issue a “Stop” command.
When performing a clip recording, the first frame of the recording

starts at the selected IN point, and ends one field before the selected
OUT point. For example, with a 5:00 record duration, the IN point will
be 00.00.00.0 f1, and the OUT point will be 00:00:04:29 f2 (or
00:00:04:24 f2 in the 625 line standard). Thus, the IN point is “included”
in the recording (inclusive), while the OUT point is “excluded” from
the recording (exclusive).
5-2
Clip Recording Prerequisites

Before recording a clip it is important to set the following items:
• Record Attributes
• Clip Elements (VKA)
• Record Duration
Record Attributes
The following record attributes determine a clip’s channel configura-
tion, record format, and timecode display:
• Video + Key Channel Configuration
• Video/Video
• Video+Key
• Time Delay
• Record Format
• DV25
• DV50
5
Before making a recording, it is important to confirm the record
attributes are set properly. They can be set once, saved to memory and
left as default settings for all new clip recordings, or changed for an
individual clip recording. For details on configuring these parameters,
please refer to Section 4: System Configuration.
Clip Elements (VKA)

Before making a recording, you must enable the clip elements (video,
key, and audio) to record. Once a clip is recorded, its recorded ele-
ments are shown in the lower right corner of the LCD display in Clip
Play mode.

Ch
(Clip Untitled) Network
V-A
5-3
■ Setting the record track enables:

•Toggle V, K, A1, A2, A3, A4 as desired.
The enable buttons that are illuminated define which tracks get
recorded.
Note: A channel must be configured as Video+Key in order to assign the Key (K) track
to a new clip recording.
Record Duration
You can utilize the currently set record duration (held in system mem-
ory), or define a new record duration. To check the currently set
record duration, press and hold the REC button and the duration will
appear in the timecode display on the control panel.
When entering a record duration, the old duration is overwritten by the

new duration. The new duration remains in the memory “buffer” until
changed.
■ Setting a Record Duration:

1. Type the record duration into the numeric keypad.
For example, for a record duration of 15 seconds, type 1  5 

00 into the numeric keypad. It will appear as follows in the time-
code portion of the control panel display:
Ch
OPEN CLIP Network
(Clip Untitled)
2. Press the REC button to set the recording duration:

Ch
OPEN CLIP Network
(Clip Untitled)
The record duration is shown in the display as long as the REC but-
ton is held down. If the REC button is released, the display returns
to the previous state, with the new record duration held in memory.
5-4
Record Duration Examples

■ Enter a 1-frame duration:
Press: 1  REC
Display: 00.00.00.01 RecDr
■ Enter a 1-field duration:

Press: Shift + f1/f2  REC
Display: 00:00:00:00 RecDr
■ Enter a 1-second duration:

Press: 1  00  REC
Display: 00.00.01.00 RecDr
5-5
Recording Clips
This section covers basic recording on the Abekas 6000 server. The fol-
lowing procedures are covered:
• Recording to a New Clip ID

• Recording to the NEXT or PREVIOUS Clip ID
• Recording into an Existing Clip ID
• Allocate Recording a New Clip ID
• Recording Live or Frozen Video
• Recording a Still
• Points to Know About Recording Clips
• Locking a Clip
Recording to a New Clip ID

At least one channel must first be acquired in order to make a record-
ing. Press the Bypass button to confirm the video, key, and audio
input signals are correct.
1. Define a new Clip ID:

•Type the ID number (15036) into the numeric keypad, and
then...
• Press the CLIP ID button.
The LED below the CLIP ID button will turn RED, to indicate an
open clip ID has been selected. This also causes the Clip ID and
LCD display to provide the following ID and message:
Ch
OPEN CLIP Network
(Clip Untitled)
2. Enable the desired record track elements:

3. Define a record duration (optional).
5-6
Recording Clips
4. While holding down REC, press PLAY $ to start the recording.

Ch
RECORDING New Clip Network
(Clip Untitled)
The timecode value increments during the recording process. Dur-

ing the record operation, the lamp inside the REC button is illumi-
nated.
When the recording is finished, the timecode stops incrementing and

the clip is automatically cued to the first field (or framedepending
upon the output mode) of the clip. Also, the lamp inside the REC but-
ton is extinguished, the lamp inside the STOP button is illuminated,
and the clip title reads “(Clip Untitled)”, as follows:
Ch

This completes the recording of the new clip. The new clip may now
be titled, cued, or played.
5
Recording to the NEXT or PREVIOUS Clip ID
Using the ! and " buttons, you can easily record to the NEXT or PRE-
VIOUS open Clip ID, relative to the currently cued clip without having
to type the new Clip ID number.
At least one channel must first be acquired in order to make a record-

ing. Press the Bypass button to confirm the video, key, and audio
input signals are correct.

2. Define a Record Duration (optional). You can utilize the currently
set record duration (held in system memory), or define a new record
duration.
3. Record to the NEXT open Clip ID:
•While holding down REC, press the ! button.
5-7
This action starts the recording process and the displays appear as
follows (assuming Clip ID 2609 is available):
Ch
RECORDING New Clip Network
(Clip Untitled)
4. Recording to the PREVIOUS open Clip ID:

•While holding down REC, press the " button.
Recording into an Existing Clip ID

Use this feature to replace clip elements already recorded or to add
non-existing elements to a clip. For example, you may have a clip that
has video recorded and you desire to add a key element to the clip.
In order to record into an existing clip ID, you must first cue the clip
into the active video channel. Press the Bypass button to confirm the
video, key, and audio input signals are correct.
The record duration is restricted to the length of the clip ID that’s being
recorded into. The current record duration may be automatically trun-
cated, depending upon the clip length and the current timecode posi-
tion within the clip. For example, if the existing clip is 30 seconds long,
and the recording is started at 00.00.00.00, then the duration of the new
recording is limited to 30 seconds. If the new recording is started at
5.00 seconds into the clip, then the duration of the new recording is
limited to 25 seconds. If you define a longer record duration than the
clip can accommodate, the record duration is automatically truncated.
1. Cue the clip:

•On the numeric keypad, type the Clip ID number that you want
to record into.
•Press CLIP ID
For example, to cue Clip ID 2608 into the active channel, press 2 
6  0  8 into the numeric keypad and then press CLIP ID. The
Clip ID and LCD display appear as follows:
Ch
Election of San Francisco board of super Network
visors. V-A
5-8
Recording Clips
2. Seek within the clip:
If desired, play or seek to any timecode point within the clip. The
current timecode position in the clip is where the recording will
start.

4. Define a record duration (optional):
5. While holding down REC, press PLAY $ to start the recording.
When the recording is finished, the timecode stops incrementing on
the final field (or framedepending upon the output mode) of the
clip, the lamp inside the REC button is extinguished, the lamp inside
the STOP button is illuminated, and the clip title reads the same as it
was before, as follows:
Ch
Election of San Francisco board of super Network
visors. V-A
This completes the recording of the existing clip. The altered clip may
now be titled, cued, or played. 5
Allocate Recording a New Clip ID

The record Allocate function allows you to instantly “record” a clip of
any length without actually recording the video, key or audio material.
This function is used when you wish to create a virtual clip into which
video, key and/or audio material is recorded into the clip at a later
time.
At least one channel must first be acquired in order to make a record

Allocate.
1. Define a New Clip ID:

•Type the ID number into the numeric keypad, and then...
•Press the CLIP ID button.
3. Define a Record Duration (optional):
5-9
4. While holding down REC, press the FF button to start the Record
Allocate.
The timecode value is replaced with the message “Allocating Clip”

Ch
ALLOCATING New Clip Network
(Clip Untitled)
during the record allocate process.
When the record allocate is finished, the clip title reads “(Clip Unti-
tled)”, as follows:
Ch
V-A
The video output for the clip also displays a “Big Red X”.
This completes the record allocate of the new clip. The new clip may
now be titled, recorded into, cued, or played.
Note: If the newly allocated clip is played, the video that happens to be present on the
disk is what gets played. In some cases, this may be “noise”.
Recording Live or Frozen Video

The Freeze function determines if live or frozen video is recorded. The
Bypass function determines which source is recorded or frozen. The
following recording conditions apply (assuming video, key, and audio
elements are enabled):
• Bypass OFF, Freeze OFF

Live input video, key, and audio are recorded.
• Bypass OFF, Freeze ON

A frozen off-disk video and key image are recorded, with muted
audio recorded.
5-10
Recording Clips
• Bypass ON, Freeze OFF

Live input video, key, and audio are recorded.
• Bypass ON, Freeze ON

A frozen input video and key image are recorded, with muted audio
recorded.
When enabled, Freeze remains active during any transport command

used to move the disk. This allows you to freeze an image, move the
disk to a new location, and record the frozen image elsewhere. The
only way to cancel Freeze is by toggling the Freeze button off.
Recording a Still
Still frames can be recorded from live input video or from off-disk
video. Stills can be recorded as Video only or Video+Key as described
in Recording Live or Frozen Video above. The source that is recorded
depends on the condition of the Bypass button, channel configuration,
and enabled record elements.
5
The following procedures are covered:
• Recording a Live Input Still Frame

• Recording an Off-Disk Still Frame
• Recording a Video+Key Still Frame
Recording a Live Input Still Frame

■ To record a still frame from live input video to a new clip ID:
1. Press Bypass to view live input video.
2. Press Freeze to capture the desired image in the framestore.
3. Enter a new Clip ID where you wish to record the frozen image.
•Type the Clip ID into the numeric keypad, then...
•Press CLIP ID
Note: You can also record to the NEXT or PREVIOUS Clip ID following the instructions
given previously.
5-11
4. Make sure the video track is enabled, toggling the V button as

required.
5. Set the recording duration to 1 frame:
•Type 1 into the numeric keypad.
•Press REC
6. Record the frozen image:
•While holding REC, press PLAY $
The frozen image records for a duration of 1 frame.
Recording an Off-Disk Still Frame

■ To take a still frame from within an existing clip and record it into a
new clip ID:
1. Locate the Clip that has the frame you wish to record:
•Type the Clip ID number into the numeric keypad and press
CLIP ID, or...
•Toggle through the NEXT or PREVIOUS clips using the ! and
" buttons
2. Using any transport mode (or GOTO), cue the disk to the desired
image that you wish to record.
3. Press Freeze to capture the image in the framestore.
4. Enter a new Clip ID where you wish to record the frozen image.
•Press CLIP ID
given previously.
5. Make sure the video track is enabled, toggling the V button as

required.
•Press REC
5-12
Recording Clips

•While holding REC, press PLAY $
The frozen image records for a duration of 1 frame.
Recording a Video+Key Still Frame

■ To record a Video+Key still frame from live input video to a new
clip ID:
1. Make sure that a channel pair is configured for Video+Key. Verify
the proper video and key signals are connected to their respective
channel inputs.
2. Press Bypass to view live input video and key signals.
3. Press Freeze to capture the desired image (Video+Key) in the
framestore.
4. Enter a new Clip ID where you wish to record the frozen image
(Video+Key).
•Press CLIP ID. 5
given previously.
5. Make sure the video and key tracks are enabled, toggling the V and
K buttons as required.
•Press REC.
•While holding REC, press PLAY $.
The frozen image (Video+Key) records for a duration of 1 frame.
5-13
Points to Know About Recording Clips

■ To change the record length and perform a recording, type the
desired record length into the numeric keypad and while holding
down REC, press PLAY $.
■ When entering a record duration, the old duration is overwritten by
the new duration. The new duration remains in the “buffer” until
changed.
■ The IN point (disk location) where recording starts is included in the
recording; the OUT point (as calculated by the record duration) is
excluded. For example, position the disk at 25.00, and enter a 1.00
record durationfor a calculated OUT point at 26.00. When the
recording is performed, the first recorded field is 25.00 while the last
recorded field is 25:29 in the 525 line standard, or 25:24 in the 625
line standard. When recording stops, the disk parks at 26.00, 1 field
after the recorded OUT point.
Locking a Clip
Once a clip has been recorded, you can lock (write protect) the clip to
prevent it from being over-recorded, modified, moved, or deleted.
■ To lock the current Clip ID from the Control Panel:

1. Press Shift + REC to toggle the status to “locked”.
The Clip ID Locked LED (directly below the REC button) turns red,
to indicate the Clip ID is locked.
■ To unlock the current Clip ID from the Control Panel:

1. Press Shift + REC to toggle the status to “unlocked”.
The Clip ID Locked LED (directly below the REC button) turns OFF,
to indicate the Clip ID is unlocked.
5-14
Numeric Entry
Numeric Entry
This section explains the manner in which the Abekas 6000 server dis-
plays numbers and how you enter and mark numbers (Timecode loca-
tions and Clip ID's) on the Abekas 6000. The following topics are
covered:
• Timecode Display
• Timecode Threshold
• Entering Timecode Numbers
• Marking Edit Points
• Setting Edit Points
• Trimming Edit Points
• Clearing Edit Points
Timecode Display
The following display conventions apply for IN points, OUT points,
record durations, “Goto” locations, and the current position indicator.
5
■ Timecode numbers are in 8-digit notation
“hours:minutes:seconds:frames”. The minimum timecode is
00.00.00.00 (start of clip). For example:
00.02.14.02 (two minutes . fourteen seconds . two frames, field-1)
■ A decimal (.) between the “hour, minutes, seconds, and frames”
columns indicates Field-1 numbers. For example:
00.14.06.07 (fourteen minutes. six seconds. seven frames, field-1)
■ A colon (:) between the “hour, minutes, seconds, and frames”
columns indicates Field-2 numbers. For example:
00:01:10:22 (one minute : ten seconds : twenty two frames, field-2)
■ In the 525 line standard, in which there are 30 frames-per-second,
valid numbers in the “frames” column range from 00 to 29. In the
625 line standard, in which there are 25 frames-per-second, valid
numbers in the “frames” column range from 00 to 24.
5-15
Timecode Threshold
When entering timecode numbers on the numeric keypad, the Time-
code Threshold value (default = 100) determines whether an entered
number is a timecode value in “hours:minutes:seconds:frames” format
or a frame number that is converted to a timecode value. For example,
with a threshold value of 300, numbers below the “threshold” are inter-
preted as frame values (e.g., 120 = 00.00.04.00, or 00.00.04.20 in the
625 line standard) and numbers above the threshold are interpreted as
timecode values (e.g., 400 = 00.00.04.00).
■ To change the Timecode Threshold value:

1. Press Menu to bring up the User Menu display on the status monitor
output. The Exit button may need to be pressed once or twice to
return to the HOME menu.
CHANNEL CONFIG
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
RS422 PORT ASSIGN
AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
>PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
2. Highlight PANEL SETUP with the knob and press TAKE to enter the
sub-menu.
PANEL SETUP (1/2)
>TC Threshold = 100
(EXIT)
3. Highlight TC THRESHOLD with the knob and press TAKE.
5-16
Numeric Entry
4. Rotate the knob to the desired value and press TAKE to accept the
value or enter a value with the numeric keypad and press TAKE to
accept the value.
desired.
Entering Timecode Numbers

When entering timecode numbers, you first type the “number” on the
numeric keypad, then select the “function” on the control panel or
menu display (Goto, Mark In, Mark Out, REC duration, Var Play value,
or a sub-menu parameter).
Note: In order to make a numeric entry that applies toward a timecode value, there
must be at least one channel acquired by the control panel.
For example, assuming channel A has been acquired and is active, with
Clip ID 9317 cued, and the disk parked at timecode 17.04, the displays
5
read:
Ch
New planet discovered near Pluto. Network
V-A
■ To seek the disk to timecode 4.05 within the clip (TC Threshold =
100):
1. Type 4 — 0 — 5:
2. Then press GOTO:

Notice that the leading zeros and decimals are automatically dis-
played when the seek is completed.
5-17
■ To seek the disk to timecode 4.00.00 within the clip:
1. Type 4 — 00 — 00:
Notice that two zeros are automatically displayed when 00 is

pressed.
2. Then press GOTO to seek the disk.
■ To seek the disk to 120 frames within the clip (TC Threshold = 300):
1. Type 1 — 2 — 0:
2. Then press GOTO:

In the 525 line standard, notice that the disk seeks to the equivalent
timecode value of 120 frames (4 seconds).
In the 625 line standard, the disk seeks to the equivalent timecode
value of 120 frames (4 seconds, 20 frames).
Changing an Entry from Frames to Timecode

■ If you’ve entered 120 frames (4 seconds in the 525 line standard, or
4 seconds, 20 frames in the 625 line standard) and want to change it
to 1.20 (one second twenty frames):
1. Type 1 — 2 — 0:
5-18
Numeric Entry
2. Then press FRM/TC:

Pressing GOTO will now seek the disk to 00.00.01.20 instead of

00.00.04.00 (or 00.00.04.20 in the 625 line standard).
Changing an Entry from Field 1 to Field 2

■ If you’ve entered 4.00.00 (field 1) and want to change it to 4:00:00
(Field 2):
1. Type 4 — 00 — 00:
2. Then press Shift + f1/f2:

5
Pressing GOTO will now seek the disk to 00:04:00:00 (field 2).
Points to Know About Timecode Entry

• Press Shift + f1/f2 after a number for a field 2 entry.
• Field 1 entries are shown with a decimal between seconds and
frames; field 2 entries are shown with a colon.
• Press the FRM/TC button to toggle a keypad entry between absolute
frames notation and timecode notation.
• Press Shift + UNDO to undo an incorrect entry.
• Press BACKSPACE to clear numbers if you make an error.
• Press Shift + CLEAR or press and hold down BACKSPACE for one
second to clear the entire numeric keypad register.
• When you attempt to enter an invalid timecode, frame, or Var Play
value no action is taken and the timecode display returns to its previ-
ous value.
• In order to make a numeric entry that applies toward a timecode
value, there must be at least one channel acquired by the control
panel.
5-19
Marking Edit Points

Marking an IN point or OUT point involves selecting a desired time-
code point based on the disk's current position. Selecting edit points
while the disk is in motion is often called “marking on the fly”. To
mark an edit point, the disk may be stopped, in motion (normal play,
Var Play, forward or reverse), or cued to a specific location after issuing
a Goto command.
1. Ensure that the Timecode display is clear. If not, press Shift +

CLEAR or press and hold BACKSPACE to clear the numbers.
2. Visually locate the desired edit point, using any available transport
function, including GOTO. Remember the disk may be stopped or
in motion while marking edit points.
3. Mark the desired edit point:
•Press MARK IN to mark the IN point.
•Press MARK OUT to mark the OUT point.
4. If necessary, re-mark the edit point the same way. The new mark
overwrites the old.
Setting Edit Points

Setting an IN point or OUT point involves typing the desired value into
the numeric keypad, and then “setting” that value into the destination
function. To set an edit point, the clip does not need to be cued to the
desired point.
1. Ensure the keypad register is clear. If not, press Shift + CLEAR or

press and hold BACKSPACE to clear the numbers.
2. Type the desired number on the keypad.
3. Select the number's destination (IN point, OUT point or REC length):
•Press MARK IN (IN point) to set the IN register.
•Press MARK OUT (OUT point) to set the OUT register
•Press REC to set the Record Duration register.
The keypad entry transfers to the selected destination register.
4. If necessary, re-set the selected edit point the same way. The new
value overwrites the old.
5-20
Numeric Entry
Trimming Edit Points

Trimming an IN point or OUT point involves setting a positive or nega-
tive sign (+ or -), typing the desired trim value into the numeric key-
pad, and then “setting” that value into the destination function.
1. Ensure the keypad register is clear. If not, press Shift + CLEAR or

press and hold BACKSPACE to clear the numbers.
2. Set the sign (+ or -) for the trim value:
•Press (+) to set a positive trim
•Press (-) to set a negative trim
3. Type the desired trim value on the keypad.
4. Select the number's destination (IN point, OUT point, Goto, or REC
length):
•Press MARK IN (IN point) to trim the IN point.
•Press MARK OUT (OUT point) to trim the OUT point.
•Press GOTO to seek the disk by the trim value.
•Press REC to trim the Record Duration.
5
The keypad entry trims the selected destination register.
5. If necessary, re-trim the selected edit point the same way. The new
value overwrites the old.
Alternate Method Enter the trim value on the keypad first, then select
the trim sign using the (+) or (-) buttons, then select the destination
button (MARK IN, MARK OUT, GOTO, or REC).
Clearing Edit Points

Clearing an IN point or OUT point involves pressing Shift + CLEAR
then selecting the edit point to be cleared. The disk does not need to
be cued on order to “clear” the desired edit point.
1. Ensure the keypad register is clear.

2. Press Shift + CLEAR. The word “Clear” will appear in the Timecode
Display.
3. Select the register to clear (IN point, OUT point or REC length):
•Press MARK IN (IN point) to clear the IN register.
•Press MARK OUT (OUT point) to clear the OUT register.
•Press REC to clear the Record Duration register.
5-21
Cueing and Playing Clips

This section details clip recall and playback methods. The following
topics are covered:
• Cueing Clips
• Playing a Clip
• Using Goto
• Loop and Ping-Pong Play Repeat
• Freezing Video
• Selecting Test Patterns
Cueing Clips
To cue (or recall) a clip, you must have a channel acquired and active
and be in the Clip Play mode (by pressing the CLIP PLAY button).
Cueing a Clip using the Numeric Keypad

■ To cue clip ID 1400:
1. Type 1 — 4 — 0 — 0 into the numeric keypad.
Ch
New planet discovered near Pluto. Network
V-A
The keypad value first appears in the "Timecode" portion of the

numeric display.
2. Then press CLIP ID. The value is transferred to the Clip ID register.
The timecode display updates to reflect the current disk position
within the clip—in this case, the start of the clip at 00.00.00.00 time-
code.
Ch
Janet Reno dining with Madeline Albright Network
V-A Hours Minutes Seconds Frames Output Mode

Notice that the clip title is also updated to reflect the title of the cur-
rently cued clip ID.
Alternate Method First press the CLIP ID button followed by the

numeric value, and finish with a press of the ENTER button. Pressing
5-22
the CLIP ID button first does not change any information in any of the
displaysrather, this action simply illuminates the led within the CLIP
ID button.
One of the following occurs:

• If the clip is on your local server, the clip cues. As long as the STOP
button is illuminated, the clip is cued and ready to play.
• If the clip you recall does not exist, pressing the ! or " button cues
the closest clip above or below the number you entered. In this way,
if you don’t know the exact number of the clip, you can enter a num-
ber that you think is close and then use the ! or " buttons to get to
the clip you want.
• If the Clip ID you entered does not exist (e.g. Clip ID 1), the CLIP ID
button LED lights RED and the control panel display reads:
Ch
OPEN CLIP Network
(Clip Untitled)
This indicates an open Clip ID that can be recorded into. If you do

not want to record into this Clip ID, pressing the ! or " button cues 5
the closest clip above or below the number you entered.
• If the Clip ID entered resides on a remote server, the video output
remains unchanged (keeping the previous clip in place), but the LCD
displays the message “Clip ####### on Node ###”. In order to play
the clip, it must first be copied or moved to the local server.
• If the Clip ID you entered cannot be cued, there is an error message
indicating the reason. In this case, enter a new Clip ID and try again.
Cueing Clips using the Arrow Buttons

If you have a group of clips that follow in sequential order, or to find
the clip with a clip ID closest to a clip ID you just entered, you can use
the ! and " buttons.
■ Press to cue the NEXT Clip ID number.

■ Press to cue the PREVIOUS Clip ID number.
Note: Clip IDs that reside on remote Abekas 6000 servers are skipped when cueing clips
using the ! and " buttons if the Network button is OFF.
5-23
Cueing Clips across the Network

Pressing the Network button (next to the timecode display) toggles
network access ON and OFF. The Network button’s LED shows the
network access status (green = ON). With network access enabled, you
can Modify, Title, Move, Delete (when Net Delete is ON), and Copy
clips from remote network servers. If a Clip ID entered resides on a
remote server, the video output remains unchanged (keeping the previ-
ous clip in place), but the LCD displays the message “Clip ####### on
Node ###”. In order to play the clip it must be copied or moved to the
local server.
If the Clip ID entered resides on a remote server and the Network but-
ton is OFF, the Network Clip Database is still active and the video out-
put remains unchanged (keeping the previous clip in place), but the
LCD displays the message “Clip ####### on Node ###”. In order to play
the clip it must be copied or moved to the local node.
Playing a Clip
With a clip cued and active, it is ready to be played. To ensure a clip is
active, the STOP button’s LED must be lit. Clip Play (normal) playback
is at normal speed (1.000x play) in either the forward or reverse direc-
tions.
■ To perform a normal speed playback:

1. Press CLIP PLAY to set normal clip playback.
2. Press PLAY $ to issue the “play forward” command. The clip will
continue to play until it reaches its end and then stop.
Note: You may change the play direction (# PLAY ) while the disk is playing.
3. Press STOP to conclude playback at any time during clip playback.

Pressing PLAY $ again commences playback of the clip at the point
where you pressed STOP.
5-24
Using other Transport Functions with a Clip

Use the following transport controls to cue a clip to a desired location.
• STOP + ❙# JOG  instantly cues to the beginning of the clip.
• STOP + JOG $❙  instantly cues to the end of the clip.
• JOG $❙  jogs the clip forward by one field or one frame depend-
ing upon the current output mode setting. Press and hold for about
one second to jog continuously at approximately 1/4 play speed.
• ❙# JOG  jogs the clip backward by one field or one frame depend-
ing upon the current output mode setting. Press and hold for about
one second to jog continuously at approximately 1/4 play speed.
• FF $$  Plays the disk from the current disk position at 60 times
normal play speed.
• REW ##  Plays the clip backward from the current disk position
at 60 times normal play speed.
• Shuttle  Press Shuttle and then use the knob to shuttle either
direction through a clip. There are 10 forward and 10 reverse speeds.
• Jog  Press Jog and then use the knob to jog either direction
through a clip. Each click of the knob denotes a single field (or sin- 5
gle frame) incrementation depending upon the current output mode
setting.
• Var Play  Press Var Play and then use the knob to play the clip at
slow or fast speeds (-3.000 up to +3.000 times normal play speed).
Using Variable Play

The Abekas 6000 plays at any speed between 99.999 times normal
speed forward to 99.999 times normal speed in reverse. When using
the rotary knob on the Abekas 6000 control panel, the play speed
range is from -3.000 up to +3.000 times normal play speed. At any play
speed, the Abekas 6000 video output is full broadcast quality. This sec-
tion explains how to enter different play speeds and initiate the Vari-
able Play function.
5-25
Defining a Var Play Speed

■ To define a Var Play speed (between -99.999 up to +99.999 times
normal play speed) and play the clip at that speed:
1. Type the desired number into the numeric keypad, then...
2. Press Var Play
3. Press PLAY $ to begin playback at the specified speed.
■ To specify a decimal value, use the decimal button (.) on the

numeric keypad. For example, 2.5x normal play speed:
1. Press 2  Shift + .  5
2. Then press Var Play to set the speed.
■ To specify a “negative” variable play speed, press the (-) button

before entering the desired speed value. For example, 2.5x normal
play speed reverse:
1. Press -  2  Shift + .  5
2. Then press Var Play to set the speed.
Playing with Var Play Speed

1. Make sure you are in Clip Play mode.
2. Cue to the point you want playback to start from using any available
transport control, or use GOTO.
3. Make sure the Var Play speed is the value you want.
4. Enable Var Play playback in one of two ways. To engage Var Play
playback while the disk is playing:
•Press # PLAY or PLAY $ and then...
•Press Var Play.
To “arm” the system for Var Play playback prior to issuing the play
command:
5-26
•Press STOP then...

•Press Var Play.
Then play the disk in the normal manner:
•Press # PLAY or PLAY $.
Points to Know About Var Play

■ You may enable or disable Var Play during playback by toggling the
Var Play button. When toggled in this way, the last Var Play speed
value is used.
■ You can change the variable speed value while the disk is playing.
Enter the desired speed on the numeric keypad, and press Var Play.
Using GOTO
In Clip Play mode, the Goto function allows you to seek (or cue) the
disk to a given location within a clip.
■ Performing a “Goto”: 5
1. Verify you are in Clip Play mode, by pressing the CLIP PLAY button.
2. Type the desired timecode or frame count location on the numeric
keypad.
3. Press GOTO. The disk immediately cues to the desired location.
■ Goto a Mark IN or Mark OUT point:
1. Press GOTO. The LED below the GOTO button will light green.
2. Then press MARK IN to seek to the IN point, or press MARK OUT
to seek to the OUT point.
You can also press and hold GOTO then toggle between the MARK IN
or MARK OUT buttons to seek to one point and then the other.
■ Using a trim value with Goto:

1. Enter a trim value (e.g. +1.00) on the numeric keypad.
2. Press GOTO. In this example the disk will seek +1.00 (one second
forward) from the current location.
5-27
Following are several Goto examples:

■ Timecode: Go to 5 seconds (field 1):
Press: 5  00  GOTO
Display: 00.00.05.00 f1
■ Timecode: Go to 18 seconds, 3 frames (field 2):

Press: 1  8  0  3  Shift + f1/f2  GOTO
Display: 00:00:18:03 f2
■ Frames: Go to disk location 500 frames (field 1):

Press: 5  0  0  GOTO
Display: 00.00.05.00 f1 (TC Threshold = 300)
■ Frames: Go to 124 frames (field 2):

Press: 1  2  4  Shift + f1/f2  GOTO
Display: 00:00:04:04 f2 (TC Threshold = 300) (in 525 line standard)
Display: 00:00:04:24 f2 (TC Threshold = 300) (in 625 line standard)
Loop and Ping-Pong Play Repeat

Two play “repeat” modes are available: Loop and Ping-Pong. This sec-
tion covers Loop and Ping-Pong functionality in Clip Play mode.
Loop
Loop is a continuous play mode between the beginning and end of a
clip or a marked range within a clip. When you initiate a forward,
reverse, or variable speed playback in the Loop mode, the disk contin-
uously repeats the entire clip (from one end to the other) or a range
within the clip. A playback range is defined using mark IN and OUT
points.
5-28
The following diagram illustrates forward playback while loop is active.

Pressing the PLAY $ button when the disk is positioned between the
IN and OUT points makes the disk play forward from the marked IN
point to the OUT point. At the OUT point, the disk immediately seeks
to the marked IN point and then plays forward to the OUT point again.
This cycle repeats until the STOP button is pressed.
Notice that the IN point is included in the loop playback, while the
OUT point is excluded from the loop playback.
Loop Material
MARK IN MARK OUT

Clip Material Point Point
f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1
PLAY
SEEK
Continuous Loop Playback of "Loop Material"
5
f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2
Loop Cycle #1 Loop Cycle #2 Loop Cycle #3
For Reverse playback the disk plays from the OUT point to the IN
point, then jumps (seeks) to the OUT point, and repeats the sequence
until the STOP button is pressed.
Ping-Pong
Ping-Pong is a continuous play mode between the beginning and end
of a clip or a marked range within a clip. When you initiate a forward,
reverse, or variable speed playback in the Ping-Pong mode the disk
repeatedly plays back a clip (or a range within a clip) from one end to
the other in one direction and back again in the opposite direction.
You define a playback range using mark IN and OUT points.
5-29
The following illustration shows an example of the Ping-Pong function

in Forward Play. Pressing the PLAY $ button makes the disk play for-
ward from the IN point to the OUT point. When the OUT point is
reached, the disk reverses and plays backwards to the IN point, then
reverses and plays forward again.
Notice that the IN point is included in the ping-pong playback, while

the OUT point is excluded from the ping-pong playback.
Ping-Pong Material
MARK IN MARK OUT

Clip Material Point Point
f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2
PLAY
PLAY
Continuous Ping-Pong Playback of "Ping-Pong Material"
f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2
Ping-Pong Cycle #1 Ping-Pong Cycle #2 Ping-Pong Cycle #3
When you press the # PLAY button, the disk plays backwards from
the OUT point to the IN point, reverses and plays forward to the OUT
point. The Ping-Pong play repeat cycle continues until the STOP but-
ton is pressed.
Note: During Ping-Pong play repeat, JOG $❙ and ❙# JOG may appear to step in the
wrong direction, depending upon the play direction of the Ping-Pong cycle at the time
the Jog command is issued.
Setting a Loop or Ping-Pong Range

1. Set the starting point for the play repeat by marking an IN point “on
the fly” or setting an IN point as follows:
•Type the desired IN point value into the numeric keypad.
•Press MARK IN
5-30
2. Set the ending point for the play repeat by marking an OUT point
“on the fly” or setting an OUT point as follows:
•Type the desired OUT point value into the numeric keypad.
•Press MARK OUT
Note: If you do not mark an IN point and OUT point, the entire clip length is used as
the Loop or Ping-Pong area (from zero to the end of the clip).
3. Toggle the Play Repeat button until the desired repeat mode is
selected:
= Loop.
= Ping-Pong.
The Play Repeat button LED flashes to indicate that the play repeat
mode is active.
4. Press PLAY $ to begin playback.

5
Assigning a Play Repeat Mode to a Clip
When a clip is recorded, the current Play Repeat mode is saved with
the clip. When that clip is recalled its Play Repeat mode will be turned
on. A Play Repeat mode can be assigned or removed from an existing
clip by first selecting the desired Play Repeat mode, pressing and hold-
ing REC, then pressing the Play Repeat button.
Freezing Video
Video can be frozen (field or frame depending on the output mode set-
ting) at any time during playback of a clip by pressing the Freeze but-
ton. The clip can be stopped or in motion when capturing a freeze.
Input video can be frozen by first toggling Bypass ON.
A freeze can also be triggered at a specific time within a clip with a GPI
trigger. See Section 7: GPI Control for information on setting up GPI
triggers. After an image is frozen (input video or clip video), it can be
recorded into a new clip. See Re-Recording a Still for details on record-
ing a frozen image.
5-31
■ To freeze a frame from within an existing clip:

1. Locate the Clip that has the frame you wish to freeze:
•Type the Clip ID number into the numeric keypad and press
CLIP ID, or...
•Toggle through the NEXT or PREVIOUS clips using the ! and
" buttons.
2. Using any transport mode (or GOTO), cue the disk to the desired
image that you wish to freeze.
3. Press Freeze to capture the image in the framestore. The LED within
the Freeze button will light to indicate freeze is active.
To release a frozen image, press Freeze again.
Selecting Test Patterns

The Abekas 6000 provides a set of 10 test patterns that reside perma-
nently on the system. You may select these patterns to use as a refer-
ence signal at the video outputs. Test patterns can also be recorded
into clips by grabbing the test pattern with the Freeze button, then
recording it into a new clip.
■ To recall a test pattern to the currently selected video channel

output:
1. Type the desired Test Pattern number (0 thru 9) into the numeric
keypad, then...
2. Press Shift + CLIP ID.
To clear a test pattern from the output, simply cue another clip.
0 = BLACK
1 = BARS-SF
2 = BARS-FF
3 = RAMPBW
4 = RAMPC
5 = PULSE
6 = MULTI
7 = WHITE
8 = BORDER
9 = GRID
5-32
Quick Contents
Section 6:
• Overview
• Titling Clips
Clip Management
• Copying and Moving Clips
• Deleting Clips
Overview
This section covers Clip Management on the Abekas 6000. The follow-
ing topics are covered:
• Titling Clips
• Copying and Moving Clips
• Deleting Clips
The Clip Operations sub-panel is illustrated below. In Clip Play mode,

the TITLE, MOVE, DELETE, and COPY buttons are used to manage
clips on the local and networked Abekas 6000 servers.
6000 MULTIFLEX DTV SERVER
CLIP PLAY MODIFY TITLE MOVE DELETE COPY LIST PLAY
The titling function allows you to enter a unique Title for each clip.
You can also enter an associated Project Name and Owner Name for
each clip. These organizational tools allow you to quickly identify,
search, and group clips while working with the system.
For organizational purposes, it is often necessary to Copy and/or Move

clips from one location to another. Clip copies can be made as backups
or clips can be copied/moved to assigned locations (Clip IDs) for a
particular show’s On-Air playout. Clips from remote Abekas 6000 serv-
ers can also be copied or moved over a network to your local Abekas
6000 server.
Deleting clips is necessary for good “house-keeping”. It is good prac-

tice to periodically “purge” the Abekas 6000 and remove clips that are
no longer needed. This prevents the disks from filling up, clearing disk
space for new clip recordings.
6-2
Titling Clips
Titling Clips
This section includes the following topics:
• Control Panel
• QWERTY Keyboard
• Clip Title
• Clip Project Name
• Clip Owner Name
The Titling function utilizes the QWERTY keyboard that is connected

to the Abekas 6000 Control Panel, which is used to change the Clip ID
or List ID titling information, as well as the Project Name and Owner
Name.
A given Clip ID may have the following information applied:
• Title (up to 80 characters)

• Project Name (up to 20 characters)
• Owner Name (up to 20 characters)
6
6-3
Control Panel
On the Abekas 6000 Control Panel, when CLIP PLAY is selected, the
TITLE button is used to select which of the four information fields is to
be addressed by the QWERTY keyboard. The QWERTY keyboard is
connected directly to the “QWERTY Keyboard” port on the Abekas
6000 control panel.
■ Directly pressing the TITLE button selects the “Clip Title” function,
and places the entry cursor on the first character of the existing title.
■ Subsequent presses of the TITLE button (or the Tab key on the the
QWERTY keyboard) toggle to the next clip titling function. As each
titling operation is selected, the name of the titling operation
appears in the numeric display (to the right of the LCD display),
replacing the timecode readout as follows:
Clip Title
Ch
The rain in Spain falls mainly on the pl Network
ain, and sleeping dogs lay in puddles.

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Project Name
Ch
Project Name: Network
Owner Name:
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Owner Name (shown in same LCD screen as Project Name)
Ch
Owner Name:
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
6-4
Titling Clips
QWERTY Keyboard
In addition to using the alphanumeric character keys to define the con-
tents of the titling fields, other keys on the QWERTY keyboard can be
used to navigate through the LCD display during titling operations, as
well as for calling up previous and next clips for the titling operations.
Following is a list of the special navigation keys:
E
Completes (saves to memory) the current titling operation, and
leaves the cursor at its current position.
T
Completes (saves to memory) the current titling function, and selects
the next titling function for the same clip. For example, if the “Clip
Title” function is currently being entered, pressing the Tab key will
complete the title entry and then select the “Project Name” entry
field.
ST
Completes (saves) the current titling function, and selects the previ-
+ ous titling function for the same clip. For example, if the “Clip Title”
function is currently being entered, pressing the Shift + Tab keys
will complete the title entry and then select the “Owner Name” entry
field.
CT
Like the TITLE button on the control panel, pressing Control + Tab
+ toggles to the next clip titling function, regardless of which titling
operation is currently active and where the cursor is located within 6
that operation.
SCT
Pressing Shift + Control + Tab toggles to the previous clip titling
+ + function, regardless of which titling operation is currently active and
where the cursor is located within that operation.
P
Completes the current titling entry, and selects the previous (Page
Up) or next (Page Down) titling operation. For example, if the “Clip
Title” operation is currently being entered for clip #2608, pressing
Q the Page Up key will complete the title entry for clip #2608, and
then select the “Owner Name” entry field for clip #2608. Further,
with the “Clip Title” function currently active for clip #2608, pressing
the Page Down key will complete the title entry for clip #2608, and
then select the “Project Name” entry field for clip #2608.
C P + Completes the current titling entry, and selects previous (Control +

Page Up) or the next (Control + Page Down) valid Clip ID. The
C Q +
titling function remains the same. For example, if the “Clip Title”
function is currently being entered for clip #2608, pressing Control
6-5
+ Page Up key will complete the title entry for clip #2608, and then
recall clip ID #2607 (or the next lower clip ID, if ID 2607 does not
exist), retaining the “Clip Title” entry function.
W X
Cursor navigation keys that are used to move the cursor by one
character space within the entry field in the LCD display. The user
may combine the Control key with the Left Arrow and Right
Arrow cursor keys to move the cursor from word to word in the
entry field.
U V
Used by themselves, these are cursor navigation keys that are used
to move the cursor by one line space within the Clip Title entry field
in the LCD display.
H
Cursor navigation key that is used to move the cursor to the start of
the entry field within the LCD display. If the “title” is currently in the
display and is being edited, pressing the Home key will move the
cursor backward by 40 characters (the length of one line of text).
Therefore, if the cursor is positioned on the last character on the
second line of the display, pressing the Home key once will posi-
tion the cursor on the first character on line two of the display,
pressing the Home key a second time will place the cursor on the
first character on line one of the display.
C H
+ Moves the cursor to the very first character of the titling entry being
made.
F Cursor navigation key that is used to move the cursor to the end of
the entry field within the LCD display. If the “title” is currently in the
display and is being edited, pressing the End key will move the cur-
sor forward by 40 characters (the length of one line of text). There-
fore, if the cursor is positioned on the first character on the first line
of the display, pressing the End key once will position the cursor on
the last character on line one of the display, pressing the End key a
second time will place the cursor on the last character on line two of
the display.
C F
+
Moves the cursor to the very last character of the titling entry being
made.
C c
Copies all of the text in the currently active entry register into a copy
+ buffer. For example, if the entry cursor is currently in place in the
C I
Clip Title, pressing Control + C (or Control + Insert) will copy the
+ entire clip title into the copy buffer.
6-6
Titling Clips
C x
Copies the text in the currently active entry register into a copy
+ buffer, and deletes the text from the entry register. For example, if
the entry cursor is currently in place in the Clip Title, pressing Con-
S +
D trol + X (or Shift + Delete) will copy the entire clip title into the
copy buffer, and delete the title from the title entry register.
C v
Pastes the text from the copy buffer into the current entry register
+ (or as much as can fit, if the buffer text is larger than the entry regis-
S I
ter). For example, if the current Clip Title of 45 characters is copied
+ into the copy buffer, then Project Name is selected, and then the
contents of the copy buffer is pasted into Project Name using Con-
trol + V (or Shift + Insert) then only the first 20 characters of the
title are copied into Project Name.
C z
Undo/Redo the previous cut or paste operation.
+
AB
+
C s
Saves the changes made to the title or title elements, without remov-
+ ing the cursor from the LCD display, and without exiting the current
titling function.
D
Deletes the single character at the current cursor position. All char-
acters to the right of the cursor are shifted left after the delete oper- 6
ation.
C D
Deletes the complete word from the cursor position to the right of
+ the cursor. For example, if the cursor is on the letter “r” in the word
“operation”, pressing Control + Delete will delete the letters
“ration” from the word. Notice that the space after the word is not
deleted.
Example:
■ Cursor on “r”: this operation is intended to show
■ Control + D: this ope is intended to show
If the cursor is located on the first character of the word, then the
entire word is deleted. Notice that the space after the word is
deleted.
Example:
■ Cursor on “o”: this operation is intended to show
■ Control + D: this is intended to show
6-7
B
Deletes the single character to the left of the current cursor position.
All characters to the right of the cursor are shifted left after the Back-
space operation.
I
Toggles the typing mode between Insert and Overlay. The Output
Mode display on the Control Panel changes between “INS” and
“OVR”. In Insert mode new characters are inserted into existing text,
and in Overlay mode new characters type over existing text.
G
Reverts back to the previous entry. Press Esc to cancel changes
made before pressing Control + S.
6-8
Titling Clips
Clip Title
The title operation allows you to enter a unique title (up to 80 charac-
ters in length) for each clip.
■ To title a clip:
The following example assumes that Clip ID 2608 is being titled for
the first time.
1. At least one channel must be acquired in order to Title any clip.

2. Press CLIP PLAY to select the Clip Play mode.
3. Cue the desired clip into the currently selected channel, in the usual
manner. For example, assuming clip ID 2608 is currently cued in the
channel, the Clip ID and LCD display appear as follows:
Ch
V--
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
4. Press TITLE. This causes the “titling” function to activate, and

changes the numeric display to read “Clip Title”. A cursor also
appears in the LCD display:
Ch
Network
6
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
5. Type the title into the QWERTY keyboard:

Ch
The white house rose gard Network
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
6. Exit the title operation...
Options for Saving and Exiting Title Entry

■ Pressing these keys together will save the changes made to the title,
C s +
without removing the cursor from the LCD display, and without
exiting the current titling operation. If Control + S are pressed, then
the LCD display shows the completed title entry, and the text cursor
remains in place:
Ch
The white house rose garden in summer. Network
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
6-9
E
■ Pressing Enter on the QWERTY keyboard or ENTER on the Control
Panel will save the changes made to the title, and move the cursor
to the start of the title entry register on the LCD display, without
exiting the current titling operation:
Ch
The white house rose garden in summer. Network
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
T ■ Pressing any one of these buttons or keys will complete the current
titling operation, save the changed information, and select the next
CT
titling operation for the same clip ID. For example, with the “Clip
+ Title” operation currently being entered, pressing the Tab key will
Q
complete the “Clip Title” entry and then select the “Project Name”
entry field for the same clip ID. The LCD and numeric displays
change to show the Project Name/Owner Name page, with the
cursor placed on the first character of the Project Name.
Ch
zoo zebra Atlantic Network
travel ¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ ¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
SCT
■ Pressing any one of these keys will complete the current titling
+ + operation, save the changed information, and select the previous
titling operation for the same clip ID. For example, with the “Clip
ST +
Title” operation currently being entered, pressing the Shift + Tab
keys will complete the “Clip Title” entry and then select the “Owner
Name” entry field for the same clip ID. The LCD and numeric
P displays change to show the Project Name/Owner Name page, with

the cursor placed on the first character of the Owner Name entry
register:
Ch
Owner Name:
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Fixing a Mistake
If a mistake is discovered in the title after the Control + S buttons are
pressed, you can remove the entire title from the clip by pressing Con-
trol + X. This action copies the title into the copy buffer and at the
same time clears the existing title from the LCD display. Press Esc to
cancel changes made before pressing Control + S. The display will
revert back to the previous entry.
6-10
Titling Clips
Clip Project Name

This titling function allows operators to assign a Project Name for each
clip. A Project Name could be the title of a news story, daily show, or
special project that the clip is associated with. Once entered, operators
can identify what project a given clip is associated with.
■ To enter a Project Name:

1. At least one channel must be acquired in order to enter the Project
Name for any clip.
manner.
4. Toggle the TITLE button until the “Project Name “ operation is acti-
vated. The numeric display will read “Project Name”. A cursor also
appears in the LCD display, on the first character of the Project
Name register:
Ch
Owner Name:
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
5. Type the Project Name into the QWERTY keyboard:

Ch
Clip ID
Project Name: Zoos of the World Network

6
Owner Name:
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
6. Exit the Project Name operation...
Use the same options to save and exit the Project Name as described
previously in Clip Title: Options for Saving and Exiting Title Entry.
6-11
Clip Owner Name

This titling function allows operators to assign an Owner Name for
each clip. The Owner Name could be the name of the person who
recorded the clip or the person who is using the clip on their project.
Once entered, operators can identify who is working with a particular
clip or group of clips.
■ To enter an Owner Name:

1. At least one channel must be acquired in order to enter the Owner
Name for any clip.
manner.
4. Toggle the TITLE button until the “Owner Name “ operation is acti-
vated. The numeric display will read “Owner Name”. A cursor also
appears in the LCD display, on the first character of the Owner
Name register:
Ch
Owner Name:
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
5. Type in the Owner Name with the QWERTY keyboard:

Ch
Owner Name: Ralph Smith

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
6. Exit the Owner Name operation...
Use the same options to save and exit the Owner Name as described
previously in Clip Title: Options for Saving and Exiting Title Entry.
6-12
Copying and Moving Clips

■ Clip Copy Operations

• Copying a Single Clip ID to a New Clip ID
• Copying a Range of Clip IDs to a New Range of Clip IDs
■ Clip Move Operations
• Moving a Single Clip ID to a New Clip ID
• Moving a Range of Clip IDs to a New Range of Clip IDs
■ Network Clip Copy and Move Operations
• Network Copy Operations
• Network Move Operations
■ Copy and Move Special Notes
• Aborting a Copy / Move Operation
• Clearing From, Thru, and To Entry Fields
Clip Copy Operations

This section covers the steps used to copy a single clip or range of
clips within the same local server. The following instructions are cov-
ered: 6
• Copying a Single Clip ID to Another Clip ID
• Copying a Range of Clip IDs to a New Clip ID
Please see Network Copy Operations for instructions on how to copy

clips between networked servers.
Copying a Single Clip ID to Another Clip ID

In a “single” copy operation, the Clip ID being copied remains at its
current Clip ID location, and an identical copy is created to a new Clip
ID (assigned by the operator).
Keep the following points in mind when copying clips:

■ At least one channel must be acquired in order to copy any clips.
■ The CLIP PLAY button must be selected in order to copy an existing
Clip ID to a new Clip ID.
6-13
■ The clip ID being copied does not necessarily have to be cued in the
active play channel in order to be copied. Therefore, a given clip ID
may be copied without first cueing that clip ID. For example,
assuming clip ID 2608 is currently cued in the channel, the Clip ID
and LCD display appear as follows:
Ch
Sunbathers enjoying the warm waters off Network
the coast of Southern Portugal.

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
■ The following example assumes that Clip ID 34209 is Copied to Clip

ID 1250:
1. Press COPY to set up the clip copy operation. This action illumi-
nates the LED below the COPY button, and causes the LCD display
to appear as follows:
Ch
COPY CLIP From:¡¡¡2608 Thru:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ Network
To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Notice that the “From” field is automatically loaded with the cur-
rently cued Clip ID. Had there been no clip cued in the currently
active channel, then this field would be left blank. Also notice that
the leading numerals in the “From” field are shown as “block” char-
acters.
2. Type the “from” clip ID (34209) into the numeric keypad:

Ch
To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
As the numbers are typed, the numerals appear in the Timecode dis-
play.
3. Press From. This loads the value into the “From” field in the LCD
display:
Ch
COPY CLIP From:¡¡34209 Thru:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ Network
To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
6-14
Note: Pressing the From, Thru, or To buttons without first typing in a Clip ID, will
load the currently cued clip into the respective entry field.
4. Type the “to” clip ID (1250) into the numeric keypad.

5. Then press the To button. This loads the value into the “To” field in
the LCD display:
Ch
To:¡¡¡1250
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Again notice that the Timecode display returns to the previous

value.
6. Press ENTER to start the copy operation. While the copy operation
is underway, the LCD display indicates so with the following mes-
sage:
Ch
Copying Clip From:¡¡34209 Thru:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ Network
¡¡34209 To:¡¡¡1250
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
When the copy operation is completed, the words “Copy 6

DONE:OK” appear in the LCD display as follows:
Ch
Copy DONE:OK From:¡¡34209 Thru:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ Network
Done.
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Notice that the “From” and “To” fields retain the values that were
just used in the COPY operation.
Copying a Range of Clip IDs to a New Clip ID

In a “range” copy operation, the Clip IDs being copied remain at their
current Clip ID locations, and identical copies are created to new Clip
IDs (assigned by the operator).
Keep the following points in mind when copying clips:
■ At least one channel must be acquired in order to copy any clips.
■ The CLIP PLAY button must be selected in order to copy an existing
Clip ID to a new Clip ID.
6-15
■ The clip ID being copied does not necessarily have to be cued in

the active play channel in order to be copied. Therefore, a given clip
ID may be copied without first cueing the clip ID. For example,
Ch

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
■ The following example assumes that Clip IDs 6520 through 6530 are
Copied to Clip IDs 1250 through 1260:
1. Press COPY to set up the clip copy operation. Notice that the
“From” field is automatically loaded with the currently cued Clip ID.
Had there been no clip cued in the currently active channel, then
this field would be left blank. Also notice that the leading numerals
in the “From” field are shown as “block” characters.
2. Type the value of the “from” clip ID (6520) into the numeric keypad:
Ch
To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
play.
3. Press From, which loads the value into the “From” field in the LCD
display:
Ch
To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
6-16
4. Type the value of the “thru” clip ID (6530) into the numeric keypad
and press Thru, which loads the value into the “Thru” field in the
LCD display:
Ch
COPY CLIP From:¡¡¡6520 Thru:¡¡¡6530 Network
To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Notice that the Timecode display returns to the previous value.
5. Type the value of the “to” clip ID (1250) into the numeric keypad
and press To, which loads the value into the “To” field in the LCD
display:
Ch
COPY CLIP From:¡¡¡6520 Thru:¡¡¡6530 Network
To:¡¡¡1250 Packing? NO
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Notice that the “Packing” indicator appears. This allows you to spec-
ify whether the Clip ID's within the range of clips will be packed at
the new location. The default setting for the parameter is “NO”. To
enable the Packing function, press the Yes/No button.
Note: When enabled, the “Packing” function takes a range of Clip IDs that are out of 6
sequential order, and copies them to new Clip IDs that are in sequential order. For
example, if a range of three non-sequential clips (Clip IDs 1-10-20) are copied to Clip
ID 100, the newly copied clips will be in sequential order (Clip IDs 100-101-102). If
the copy was made without Packing enabled, the newly copied clips would maintain
their relative spacing (Clip IDs 100-110-120).
6. Press ENTER to start the copy operation. While the copy operation
sage:
Ch
Copying Clip From:¡¡¡6520 Thru:¡¡¡6530 Network
¡¡¡6520 To:¡¡¡1250 Packing? NO

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
6-17
When the copy operation is completed, the words “DONE:OK”

appear in the LCD display as follows:
Ch
Copy DONE:OK From: ¡¡¡6520 Thru:¡¡¡6530 Network
Done.
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Notice that the “From”, “Thru” and “To” fields retain the values that
were just used in the COPY operation.
Clip Move Operations

This section covers the steps used to move a single clip or range of
clips within the same local node. The following instructions are cov-
ered:
• Moving a Single Clip ID to New Clip ID

• Moving a Range of Clip IDs to a New Clip ID
Please see Network Move Operations for instructions on how to move

clips between networked nodes.
Moving a Single Clip ID to a New Clip ID

In a “single” move operation, the Clip ID for the clip being moved is
changed to a new Clip ID (assigned by the operator). The old Clip ID
becomes an “open” Clip ID for new recordings.
Keep the following points in mind when moving clips:
■ At least one channel must be acquired in order to move any clips.
■ The CLIP PLAY button must be selected in order to move an
existing Clip ID to a new Clip ID.
■ Clip IDs that are currently in use on other channels in the server will
be automatically skipped during clip move operations.
■ The clip ID being moved does not necessarily have to be cued in the
active play channel in order to be moved. Therefore, a given clip ID
may be moved without first cueing the clip ID. For example,
Ch

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
6-18
■ The following example assumes that Clip ID 520 is Moved to Clip ID

6400:
1. Press MOVE to select the Move operation. This action illuminates
the LED below the MOVE button, and causes the LCD display to
appear as follows:
Ch
MOVE CLIP From:¡¡¡2608 Thru:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ Network
To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
acters.
2. Type the value of the desired “From” Clip ID (520) into the numeric
keypad.
Ch
To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
play.
6
3. Press From, which loads the value into the “From” field in the LCD
display:
Ch
MOVE CLIP From:¡¡¡¡520 Thru:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ Network
To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
6-19
4. Type the value of the desired “To” Clip ID (6400) into the numeric
keypad. Press To, which loads the value into the “To” field in the
LCD display:
Ch
To:¡¡¡6400
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
5. Press ENTER to start the Move operation. While the Move operation
sage:
Ch
Moving Clip From:¡¡¡¡520 Thru:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ Network
¡¡¡¡520 To:¡¡¡6400
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
When the Move operation is completed, the words “DONE:OK”

Ch
Move DONE:OK From:¡¡¡¡520 Thru:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ Network
1 clip moved
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
were just used in the Move operation.
Moving a Range of Clip IDs to a New Clip ID

In a “range” move operation, the Clip IDs for the clips being moved are
changed to new Clip IDs (assigned by the operator). The old Clip IDs
become “open” Clip IDs for new recordings.
Keep the following points in mind when moving clips:
■ At least one channel must be acquired in order to move any clips.
■ The CLIP PLAY button must be selected in order to move an
existing Clip ID to a new Clip ID.
be automatically skipped during clip move operations.
■ The clip ID being moved does not necessarily have to be cued in the
active play channel in order to be moved. Therefore, a given clip ID
may be moved without first cueing the clip ID. For example,
6-20

Ch

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Moved to Clip IDs 6400 through 6410:
1. Press MOVE to select the Move operation. This action illuminates
the LED below the MOVE button, and causes the LCD display to
appear as follows:
Ch
To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
acters.
2. Type the value of the desired “From” Clip ID (520) into the numeric
keypad. Press From, which loads the value “520” into the “From””
field in the LCD display: 6
Ch
To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
3. Type the value of the desired “Thru” Clip ID (530) into the numeric
keypad. Press Thru, which loads the value “530” into the “Thru”
field in the LCD display:
Ch
MOVE CLIP From:¡¡¡¡520 Thru:¡¡¡¡530 Network
To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
6-21
4. Type the value of the desired “To” Clip ID (6400) into the numeric
keypad. Press To, which loads the value “6400” into the “To” field in
the LCD display:
Ch
MOVE CLIP From:¡¡¡¡520 Thru:¡¡¡¡530 Network
To:¡¡¡6400 Packing? NO
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Notice that the “Packing” indicator appears. This allows you to spec-
ify whether the Clip ID's within the range of clips will be packed at
the new location. The default setting for the parameter is “NO”. To
enable the Packing function, toggle the Yes button.
Note: When enabled, the “Packing” function takes a range of Clip IDs that are out of
sequential order, and moves them to new Clip IDs that are in sequential order. For
example, if a range of three non-sequential clips (Clip IDs 1-10-20) are moved to Clip
ID 100, the newly moved clips will be in sequential order (Clip IDs 100-101-102). If
the move was made without Packing enabled, the newly moved clips would maintain
their relative spacing (Clip IDs 100-110-120).
5. Press ENTER to start the Move operation. While the Move operation
sage:
Ch
Moving Clip From:¡¡¡¡520 Thru:¡¡¡¡530 Network
¡¡¡¡520 To:¡¡¡6400 Packing? NO

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
When the Move operation is completed, the words “DONE:OK”

Ch
Move DONE:OK From:¡¡¡¡520 Thru:¡¡¡¡530 Network
10 clips moved
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
were just used in the Move operation.
6-22
Network Clip Copy and Move Operations

In a multi-server environment, where there are multiple Abekas 6000
servers connected together to form a network (Ethernet and/or Fibre
Channel), it's possible to copy and/or move clips from one physical
Abekas 6000 server to another within the network. From the Abekas
6000 control panel, you may define the source and destination server
(called “Nodes”) involved in a clip copy and/or move operation. The
nodes in the network are each assigned a three-digit identification
number (the last three digits of their IP address) that the operator in
turn specifies in the clip copy and/or clip move operation.
This section covers the following:
• Network Copy Operations

• Network Move Operations
When a network clip copy or move command is initiated, the local

Abekas 6000 server first checks the Fibre Channel status of the local
and remote servers. If a Fibre Channel connection is confirmed on both
ends, then the copy or move takes place over the Fibre Channel net-
work. If the Abekas 6000 does not detect a Fibre Channel connection,
then Ethernet is used to copy or move clips between servers. For more
information on Ethernet and Fibre Channel connections and configura-
tion, please refer to the Abekas 6000 Installation guide. 6
Keep the following points in mind when copying or moving clips over
the network:
■ At least one channel must be acquired in order to copy or move any
clips.
■ The CLIP PLAY button must be selected in order to copy or move
an existing Clip ID to a new Clip ID.
be automatically skipped during clip copy or move operations.
6-23
Network Copy Operations

Before performing a network copy operation, the network connection
must be enabled, and the From (source) and To (destination) servers
must be defined. Once this is done, the network copy operation is
identical to a local copy operation.
In a “network” copy operation, the Clip IDs being copied remain on

the source (From) server, and copies are created on the destination
(To) server with new Clip IDs (assigned by the operator).
Copying Clips between Networked Servers (Nodes)

1. Press the Network + COPY buttons. This action illuminates the
lamp inside the Network button and the LED below the COPY but-
ton, and causes the LCD display to appear as follows:
Ch
COPY CLIP From-000:(All Nodes) Network
NetCopy? NetOn To-251:(This Node)

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
The Network connection turns ON. The “From-Node” defaults to

“(All Nodes)”, and the “To-Node” defaults to “(This Node)”. At the
same time, the “NetCopy?” indicator changes from “NO” to “NetON”.
2. Set the “From” node (source) ID.
If you are copying from the local server (node) to a remote server
(node):
•Type the three-digit address (last three digits of the IP address)

of the local node into the numeric keypad and press the From
button. This action sets the “From” node ID, and displays the
name “(This Node)”.
Ch
COPY CLIP From-251:(This Node) Network

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Note: If the “From” node ID is already set to (This Node), you do not need to enter any-
thing and can move on to the next step.
6-24
If you are copying from a remote server (node) to the local server
(node):

of the remote node into the numeric keypad and press the
From button. This action sets the “From” node ID for the
remote node, and displays the given name for the remote node.
Ch
COPY CLIP From-014:(Graphics-2) Network

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
•Or, if you don’t know the remote node’s ID or don’t know

which node the clip(s) you want reside on, you can set the
“From” node to “(All Nodes)”. When the copy operation is
performed, all nodes on the network are queried to find the
desired clip(s) to be copied. Use node ID “0” to specify “(All
Nodes)”.
Ch

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
3. Set the “To” node (destination) to ID.
If you are copying from the local server (node) to a remote server
(node): 6
of the remote node into the numeric keypad and press the To
button. This action sets the “To” node ID, and displays the given
name for the remote node.
Ch
NetCopy? NetOn To-014:(Graphics-2)

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
If you are copying from a remote server (node) to the local server
(node):
of the local node into the numeric keypad and press the To
6-25
button. This action sets the “To” node ID for the local node, and
displays the name “(This Node)”.
Ch

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Note: If the “To” node ID is already set to “(This Node)”, you do not need to enter any-
Once the From and To node ID numbers are set, this menu display
can be exited by pressing any other operation select button...
4. Press the COPY button (by itself, without “Shift”). The following will
appear in the LCD display:
Ch
NetON To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Notice that the “NetON” indicator now appears on line 2 of the LCD
display, which lets you know that clip Copy operations will transfer
to and/or from another server on the network.
5. Copy a single Clip ID or range of Clip IDs to another Clip ID as

described earlier in Clip Copy Operations.
6-26
To Quickly Disable/Enable the Local Server’s Network Connection

1. Simply toggle the Network button.
Ch
To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Notice that the “NetON” indicator (in the COPY CLIP display) tog-
gles OFF and ON. When it is OFF, clip Copy operations occur on the
local server only. When “NetON” is displayed, clip Copy operations
can occur between networked servers.
Alternatively, pressing Network + COPY causes the COPY CLIP Net-

work display to appear. With this display, you can see the From and To
node assignments change when the Network button is toggled.
Ch

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
You can now press the Network button to turn OFF the network
enable. This returns the menu display to the “Network Off” settings.
The “From” node and “To” node are defaulted back to the “local” node
settings.
Ch
Clip ID

6
NetCopy? To-251:(This Node)
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
If the networking needs to be turned back ON with the previous set-

tings, toggle the Network button back ON. The “From” node and “To”
revert back to the previous node settings, and network COPY is re-
enabled.
Ch

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
6-27
Network Move Operations

Before performing a network move operation, the network connection
must be enabled, and the From (source) and To (destination) servers
must be defined. Once this is done, the network move operation is
identical to a local move operation.
In a “network” move operation, the Clip IDs being moved are deleted
from the source server, and moved to the destination server with the
same or different Clip IDs (as assigned by the operator). If new Clip
IDs are assigned in the network move operation, the old Clip IDs
become “open” Clip IDs for new recordings.
Moving Clips between Networked Servers

1. Press the Network + MOVE buttons. This action illuminates the
lamp inside the Network button and the LED below the MOVE but-
ton, and causes the LCD display to appear as follows:
Ch
MOVE CLIP From-000:(All Nodes) Network
NetMove? NetOn To-251:(This Node)

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
The Network connection turns ON. The “From-Node” defaults to

“(All Nodes)”, and the “To-Node” defaults to “(This Node)”. At the
same time, the “NetMove?” indicator changes from “NO” to “NetON”.
2. Set the “From” node (source) ID.
If you are moving from the local server (node) to a remote server
(node):

of the local node into the numeric keypad and press the From
button. This action sets the “From” node ID, and displays the
name “(This Node)”.
Ch
MOVE CLIP From-251:(This Node) Network

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Note: If the “From” node ID is already set to (This Node), you do not need to enter any-
6-28
If you are moving from a remote server (node) to the local server
(node):

of the remote node into the numeric keypad and press the
From button. This action sets the “From” node ID for the
remote node, and displays the given name for the remote node.
Ch
MOVE CLIP From-014:(Graphics-2) Network

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
•Or, if you don’t know the remote node’s ID or don’t know

which node the clip(s) you want reside on, you can set the
“From” node to “(All Nodes)”. When the move operation is
performed, all nodes on the network are queried to find the
desired clip(s) to be moved.
Ch

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
3. Set the “To” node (destination) to ID.
If you are moving from the local server (node) to a remote server
(node):
6
• Type the three-digit address (last three digits of the IP address) of
the remote node into the numeric keypad and press the To but-
ton. This action sets the “To” node ID, and displays the given
name for the remote node.
Ch
NetMove? NetOn To-014:(Graphics-2)

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
If you are moving from a remote server (node) to the local server
(node):

of the local node into the numeric keypad and press the To
6-29
button. This action sets the “To” node ID for the local node, and
displays the name “(This Node)”.
Ch

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Note: If the “To” node ID is already set to “(This Node)”, you do not need to enter any-
Once the From and To node ID numbers are set, this menu display
can be exited by pressing any other operation select button...
4. Press the MOVE button (by itself, without “Shift”). The following
will appear in the LCD display:
Ch
NetON To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Notice that the “NetON” indicator now appears on line 2 of the LCD
display, which lets the user know that clip Move operations will
transfer to and/or from another server on the network.
5. Move a single Clip ID or range of Clip IDs to another Clip ID as

described earlier in Clip Move Operations.
To Quickly Disable/Enable the Local Server’s Network Connection

1. Simply toggle the Network button.
Ch
To:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Notice that the “NetON” indicator (in the MOVE CLIP display) tog-
gles OFF and ON. When it is OFF, clip Move operations occur on
the local server only. When “NetON” is displayed, clip Move opera-
tions can occur between network servers.
6-30
Alternatively, pressing Network + MOVE causes the MOVE CLIP Net-

work display to appear. With this display, you can see the From and To
node assignments change when the Network button is toggled.
Ch

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
You can now press the Network button to turn OFF the network
enable. This returns the menu display to the “Network Off” settings.
The “From” node and “To” node are defaulted back to the “local” node
settings.
Ch
NetMove? To-251:(This Node)

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
If the networking needs to be turned back ON with the previous set-

tings, toggle the Network button back ON. The “From” node and “To”
node revert back to the previous node settings, and network MOVE is
re-enabled.
Ch

System Diagnostics
6
RS422 Remote
6-31
Copy and Move Special Notes

This section describes the following special situations during copy and/
or move operations:
• Aborting a Copy / Move Operation
• Clearing From, Thru, and To Entry Fields
Aborting a Copy / Move Operation

While a copy or move operation is underway, you may abort the oper-
ation at any time by pressing the Yes/No button. This is done as fol-
lows:
■ For example, a Copy operation is underway:
Ch
Copying Clip From:¡¡34209 Thru:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ Network
¡¡34209 To:¡¡¡1250 Abort? No

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
1. Press the Yes/No button. This presents the following message:

Ch
Copy ERRORS From:¡¡34209 Thru:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ Network
Copy stopped on clip 34209

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Once the copy operation is aborted, press From or To to return to the

original COPY CLIP display:
Ch
To:¡¡¡1250
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Clearing From, Thru, and To Entry Fields

Sometimes it is necessary to clear “From/Thru/To” entry fields before
performing the desired copy or move operation. To do this, press Shift
+ CLEAR, then press the button for the field entry you wish to clear
(From, Thru, or To). This will remove the current entry for that field
in the Copy or Move display.
6-32
Deleting Clips
Deleting Clips
• Deleting a Single Clip ID

• Deleting a Range of Clip IDs
• Aborting a Range Delete Operation
• Network Delete
Deleting a Single Clip ID

Keep the following points in mind when deleting clips:
■ At least one channel must be acquired in order to delete any clips.

■ The CLIP PLAY button must be selected in order to delete an
existing Clip ID.
be automatically skipped during clip delete operations.
■ The clip ID being deleted does not necessarily have to be cued in
the active play channel in order to be deleted. Therefore, a given
clip ID may be deleted without first cueing that clip ID. For
example, assuming clip ID 2608 is currently cued in the channel, the
Clip ID and LCD display appear as follows:
6
Ch

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
■ The following example assumes that Clip ID 1250 is Deleted:

1. Press the DELETE button to set up the clip delete operation. This
action illuminates the LED below the DELETE button, and causes
the LCD display to appear as follows:
Ch
DELETE CLIP From:¡¡¡2608 Thru:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ Network
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
acters.
6-33
2. Next, type the desired Clip ID number (1250) into the numeric key-
pad:
Ch
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
play.
3. Then press the From button, which loads the value “1250” into the
“From” field in the LCD display.
Ch
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Hint: As an alternative to pressing the From button, you may skip this step and
directly proceed to the next step.
4. Press ENTER to start the delete operation. While the delete opera-
tion is underway, the LCD display indicates so with the following
message:
Ch
Deleting Clip From:¡¡¡1250 Thru:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ Network
¡¡¡1250 Abort? No
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
When the delete operation is completed, the words “DONE:OK”

Ch
Del DONE:OK From:¡¡¡1250 Thru:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ Network
1 clip deleted
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Notice that the Clip ID display and “From” field retain the Clip ID that
was just deleted. Also, the red LED under the CLIP ID button is lit indi-
cating an Open Clip that is ready to record into.
6-34
Deleting Clips
Deleting a Range of Clip IDs

Keep the following points in mind when deleting clips:
■ At least one channel must be acquired in order to delete any clips.

■ The CLIP PLAY button must be selected in order to delete an
existing range of Clip IDs.
be automatically skipped during clip delete operations.
■ The Clip ID being deleted does not necessarily have to be cued in
the active play channel in order to be deleted. Therefore, a given
Clip ID may be deleted without first cueing the Clip ID. For
example, assuming Clip ID 2608 is currently cued in the channel,
the Clip ID and LCD display appear as follows:
Ch

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Deleted:
1. Press DELETE to set up the clip delete operation. This action illumi-
nates the LED below the DELETE button, and causes the LCD dis-
play to appear as follows:
Clip TC Ext.VITC
6
Clip ID Timecode
Ch
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
acters.
2. Next, type “6520” into the numeric keypad:

Ch
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
6-35
3. Then press the From button, which loads the value “6520” into the
“From” field in the LCD display:
Ch
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
4. Next, type “6530” into the numeric keypad:

Ch
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
5. Then press the Thru button, which loads the value “6530” into the
“Thru” field in the LCD display:
Ch
DELETE CLIP From:¡¡¡6520 Thru:¡¡¡6530 Network
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
message:
Ch
Deleting Clip From:¡¡¡6520 Thru:¡¡¡6530 Network
¡¡¡6520 Abort? No
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
When the delete operation is completed, the words “DONE:OK”

Ch
Del DONE:OK From:¡¡¡6520 Thru:¡¡¡6530 Network
10 clips deleted
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Notice that the “From” and “Thru” fields retain the values that were
just used in the Delete operation.
6-36
Deleting Clips
Aborting a Range Delete Operation

You may abort a range delete operation at any time by pressing the
Yes/No button. Aborting will only protect clips that have not yet been
deleted from the selected range.
■ For example, a Range Delete operation is underway:

Ch
Deleting Clip From:¡¡¡6520 Thru:¡¡¡6530 Network
¡¡¡6520 View? YES

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
1. Press the Yes/No button. This presents the following message:

Ch
ABORT Delete From:¡¡¡6520 Thru:¡¡¡6530 Network
Abort..
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
The remaining clips in the selected range will not be deleted.
Once the delete operation is aborted, press From or To to return to

the original DELETE CLIP display:
Ch
DELETE CLIP From:¡¡¡6520 Thru:¡¡¡6530 Network
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
6
Network Delete
In a multi-server environment, where there are multiple Abekas 6000
servers connected together to form a network, it's possible to delete
clips from any one of the physical Abekas 6000 servers within the net-
work. From the control panel, the Network button is used to control
whether the clips across the entire Abekas 6000 network are included
in the delete operation, or if only the clips in the local Abekas 6000
server are included. If the LED inside the Network button is OFF, then
the delete operation only affects clips on the local Abekas 6000 server.
If the LED inside the Network button is ON, then the delete operation
affects all clips across the entire Abekas 6000 network.
As an added measure of protection, the Network Delete function may

be enabled or disabled for a particular Abekas 6000 server, via the SYS-
TEM SETUP menu. Please refer to Section 3: SYSTEM SETUP Menu for
more information.
6-37
If the Network Delete parameter is turned OFF, then it's not possible
to perform network delete operations from the given Abekas 6000
server, regardless of the status of the Network button. The Network
Delete parameter is specific to the local server only. Other servers on
the network have their own Network Delete parameter, and thus may
perform Network Delete operations regardless of the setting of the
Network Delete parameter on other servers in the network.
■ To delete a clip that resides on a remote server in the network:

1. Confirm that the Network Delete parameter in the SYSTEM SETUP
menu is ON.
2. Press the Network button to enable the Network connection.
3. Press the DELETE button to set up the clip delete operation. This
action illuminates the LED below the DELETE button, and causes
the LCD display to appear as follows:
Ch
NetOn
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Notice that “NetOn” now appears in the LCD display.

4. Next, type the desired Clip ID number (that resides on a remote
Abekas 6000 server) into the numeric keypad. Then press the From
button.
Ch
NetOn
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Hint: As an alternative to pressing the From button, you may skip this step and
directly proceed to the next step.
message:
Ch
Deleting Clip From:¡¡¡1250 Thru:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ Network
¡¡¡1250 NetOn Abort? No

System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
6-38
Deleting Clips
When the delete operation is completed, the words “Del DONE:OK”

Ch
Del DONE:OK From:¡¡¡1250 Thru:¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ Network
1 clip deleted
System Diagnostics
RS422 Remote
Notice that the Clip ID display and “From” field retain the Clip ID that
was just deleted. Also, the red LED under the CLIP ID button is lit indi-
cating an Open Clip that is ready to record into.
■ To delete a range of clips that reside on remote servers in the

network:
1. Use the same steps as deleting a single clip, but define the range of
clip IDs by using the From and Thru buttons.
6-39
6-40
Quick Contents
Section 7:
• Overview
• Auto Edit
Applications
• External Control
• GPI Control
• Time Delay
• List Play
Overview
So far, this manual has covered the basics of the Abekas 6000 system’s
Control Panel and Status Overlay operations, and how to record, play-
back, and manage clips. This section provides detailed information on
other powerful Abekas 6000 applications.
The following applications are covered:
• Auto Edit
• External Control
• GPI Control
• Time Delay
• List Play
7-2
Auto Edit
Auto Edit
The Auto Edit function is used to accurately edit video and audio mate-
rial between the Abekas 6000 and an external VTR. For example, news
footage from field tapes can be edited into news packages, voice-over
b-roll, bumpers, and highlights. Once edited with Auto Edit, the server
resident material can be played directly out to air.
• Auto Edit Overview

• Configuring a VTR for Auto Edit
• Setting Up an Auto Edit Event
• Points to Know About Auto Edit
Auto Edit Overview

With Auto Edit, the Abekas 6000 may be configured as either the
recording device or the playback device. Thus, the transfer of material
may be from the Abekas 6000 to the VTR, or from the VTR to the Abe-
kas 6000.
In order to use the Auto Edit feature, RS422 serial communications

must be established with a VTR. You also must make connections of
the video and audio from the Abekas 6000 to the VTR and from the
VTR to the Abekas 6000. Please refer to the Abekas 6000 Installation
guide for more information regarding these connections.
7
AUTO EDIT
DDR
VTR
Preview Review Enable Recorder
The AUTO EDIT button engages the Auto Edit function, which per-
forms a”machine-to-machine” automatic edit between the Abekas 6000
and an external VTR. To set up and perform the Auto Edit functions,
the Enable button must be turned ON.
Once enabled, you can select either the DDR (Abekas 6000) or the VTR
as the recording device by changing the setting of the Recorder but-
ton. The machine not set as the recorder becomes the player.
7-3
While the Auto Edit Enable button is ON, the Panel button becomes
active, and determines which device is currently under the direct con-
trol of the Abekas 6000 hardware control panel. When DDR is selected
with the Panel button, the control panel commands the Abekas 6000
server directly. When VTR is selected, the Abekas 6000 passes the com-
mands from the Abekas 6000 control panel to the external VTR. In this
manner, you may set up the Auto Edit IN and OUT points for both the
recorder and the player.
Configuring a VTR for Auto Edit

Once the hardware connections have been made between the Abekas
6000 and a VTR (RS422, video, and audio), serial port protocol, chan-
nel assignment, and editing parameters must be set and/or verified in
the RS422 PORT ASSIGN and AUTO EDIT SETUP user menus before
beginning Auto Edit operations.
Since the Abekas 6000 is a multi-channel device, the RS422 port must
be assigned to the correct channel in the server. Other editing setup
parameters, such as Preroll and Postroll for both the Abekas 6000 and
the VTR, can be adjusted in the AUTO EDIT SETUP user menu. Adjust
these parameters only as necessary if the default settings are not satis-
factory or editing accuracy is incorrect. Please refer to Section 3: AUTO
EDIT SETUP Menu for a description of each of the menu parameters.
■ To configure RS422 Serial Communications for the Auto Edit VTR:

1. Press Menu to bring up the User Menu display on the status overlay
output.

CHANNEL CONFIG
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
>RS422 PORT ASSIGN
AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
7-4
Auto Edit
2. Highlight RS422 PORT ASSIGN with the knob and press TAKE to
enter the sub-menu.

2 sony-slave [B] [OFF]
(EXIT)
3. Use the knob to move the highlight to the PROTOCOL column for
the port (RS422 port 7 through 12) that the VTR is connected to and
press TAKE.
4. Use the knob to select the “sony-master” protocol and press TAKE
to accept the selection.
The ENBL (Enable) column will report an OFF status until the
Enable button is pressed on the control panel to enable Auto Edit 7
with an external device (VTR).
5. Exit the RS422 PORT ASSIGN menu by pressing the Exit button on
the control panel or by highlighting (EXIT) with the knob and
pressing the TAKE button.
7-5
6. From the HOME MENU, highlight AUTO EDIT SETUP with the knob
and press TAKE to enter the sub-menu.

CHANNEL CONFIG
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
RS422 PORT ASSIGN
>AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
7. Highlight VTR Edit Port with the knob and press TAKE.
8. Use the knob to select the port (RS422 port 7 through 12) that the
VTR is connected to and press TAKE to accept the selection.
9. Highlight User Channel with the knob and press TAKE.
AUTO EDIT SETUP (2/14)

VTR Edit Port = 7
>User Channel = ChA
VTR Audio Trks = Digital
Clip PreRoll = 00.01.00
Src VTR Delay = +00 Fields
PostRoll = 00.01.00
VTR PreRoll = 00.03.00
VTR Edit Delay = +00 Fields
Jog Method = Use search
Jog Speed = 0.25
Jog Duration = 00.00.04
(EXIT)
10.Use the knob to select the desired channel to control the VTR and
press TAKE to accept the selection.
11.Adjust other Auto Edit parameters in the AUTO EDIT SETUP menu
as needed.
7-6
Auto Edit
12.Exit the menu and save the new settings.

13.Press Menu to remove the User Menu from the status overlay.
Setting up an Auto Edit Event

When the Enable button is engaged for the first time, there are usually
no IN and OUT points set for the currently selected device (as deter-
mined by the Panel button). The mark IN and OUT points can be
cleared individually by pressing Shift + CLEAR, followed by the given
MARK button. A duration can be cleared by pressing Shift + CLEAR,
followed by the REC button. Refer to Section 5: Numeric Entry section
for more details on Marking, Setting, and Trimming timecode entries.
The following procedures are covered:
• Auto Edit with Abekas 6000 as Recorder

• Auto Edit with VTR as Recorder
Auto Edit with Abekas 6000 as Recorder

When recording to the Abekas 6000 in Auto Edit, you can either record
one event into an open clip ID (NewClip) or record one or more events
into an existing clip ID.
When you record into an open clip ID (NewClip), the duration of the
source material from the VTR determines the duration of the NewClip
being recorded into. Only a single Auto Edit can be made to an open
clip ID (NewClip). 7
When you record into an existing clip ID, the duration of the selected
clip determines the “edit master” duration for the source material being
edited. One or more Auto Edit events can be recorded into an existing
clip, as long as a given edit does not extend past the last frame of the
selected clip on the Abekas 6000.
1. Press Enable to enable the Auto Edit feature. The lamp within the
button illuminates, to indicate Auto Edit is enabled.
2. Select the Abekas 6000 DDR as the recording device:
•Toggle Recorder so that “DDR” is illuminated.
7-7
3. Cue an existing clip or select a new clip ID to record into:

•Toggle Panel so that “DDR” is illuminated.
•Cue an existing clip on the active video channel, in the usual
manner. The-- LCD display will appear as follows:
RecDDR In= Out=

SrcVTR In= Out=
•Or, enter a new Clip ID to record into. The LCD display will
appear as follows:
NewClip In= Out=

SrcVTR In= Out=
4. This step only applies when recording to an existing clip ID: Set the
edit points on the Abekas 6000 (recorder).
•Use any transport control on the Abekas 6000 control panel to
position the clip to the edit IN point.
•Press MARK IN.
position the clip to the edit OUT point.
•Press MARK OUT. This action automatically calculates the
recording duration.
Alternatively, if you know the timecode values of the mark IN and

OUT points, you may type them into the numeric keypad and use
the MARK IN and MARK OUT buttons to “set” the edit points.
If desired, once a Mark IN or Mark OUT is present, a duration for

the edit can be entered by typing the duration value into the
numeric keypad and pressing the REC button.
5. Select the elements to be recorded on the Abekas 6000:

•Toggle the record elements as desired: V, K, A1, A2, A3, A4
7-8
Auto Edit
6. Set the edit IN point on the VTR (source player):

•Toggle Panel so that “VTR” is illuminated.
position the VTR tape to the edit IN point.
•Press MARK IN
Alternatively, if you know the timecode values of the mark IN point,

you may type it into the numeric keypad and use the MARK IN but-
ton to “set” the edit point.
The OUT point for the source VTR is automatically calculated using
the duration from the recorder. Whenever three edit points have
been specified, the fourth is automatically calculated and entered.
RecDDR In= 00.00.00.00 Out= 00.00.05.00

SrcVTR In= 01.10.12.00 Out= 01.10.17.00
7. Initiate an Auto Edit Preview (optional):

•Press Preview
When the auto edit preview is started, both the VTR and the Abekas
6000 DDR will seek to the edit preroll point and then play through
the preroll interval to the edit IN point. At the edit IN point, the Abe-
kas 6000 switches to Bypass ON to allow the material from the VTR
to be seen and heard during the edit interval. At the edit OUT point, 7
the Abekas 6000 turns Bypass OFF, and will play through the pos-
troll interval. Preroll and postroll times for the Abekas 6000 and VTR
are set in the AUTO EDIT SETUP user menu.
The edit may be previewed as many times as desired.
8. Initiate the Auto Edit Record:

•Toggle Panel so that “DDR” is illuminated if this was not done
in step 6.
•Press REC + AUTO EDIT.
9. Press STOP at any time to cancel or halt the auto edit record opera-
tion.
7-9
When the auto edit recording is started, both the VTR and the Abe-
kas 6000 DDR will seek to the edit preroll point and then play
through the preroll interval to the edit IN point. At the edit IN point,
the Abekas 6000 begins recording the material from the VTR, for the
duration of the edit interval. At the edit OUT point, the Abekas 6000
stops recording, and will postroll for the designated postroll dura-
tion.
During the preroll interval, the AUTO EDIT button blinks, while the
LED within the REC button remains OFF. At the edit IN point and
for the duration of the edit record interval, both the AUTO EDIT
button and the REC button are illuminated solidly. At the edit OUT
point and for the duration of the postroll interval, the LED within the
AUTO EDIT button resumes blinking, while the LED within the REC
button is turned OFF. At the end of the postroll interval, the LED
within the AUTO EDIT button is turned OFF.
Note: When an Auto Edit event has completed, the OUT point from the previous edit is
automatically “tagged” as the IN point for the next Auto Edit event (for both the
recorder and source device).
10.Initiate an Auto Edit Review (optional):

•Press Review
The record device (Abekas 6000) seeks to the preroll point (not the
IN point) of the edit just performed and rolls through the preroll,
edit interval, and postroll. You may press the STOP button at any
time to cancel the auto edit review operation. Further, you may
review the edit as many times as desired prior to performing the
next auto edit record.
Auto Edit with VTR as Recorder

1. Enable the Auto Edit feature:
•Press Enable
The lamp within the button illuminates, to indicate auto edit is

enabled.
7-10
Auto Edit
2. Select the VTR as the recording device:

•Toggle Recorder so that “VTR” is illuminated.
SrcDDR In= Out=

RecVTR In= Out=
3. Set the edit points on the VTR (recorder):

position the VTR tape to the edit IN point.
•Press MARK IN.
position the VTR tape to the edit OUT point.
•Press MARK OUT. This action automatically calculates the
recording duration.
Alternatively, if you know the timecode values of the mark IN and

OUT points, you may type them into the numeric keypad and use
the MARK IN and MARK OUT buttons to set the edit points.
If desired, once a Mark IN or Mark OUT is present, a duration for

the edit can be entered by typing the duration value into the
numeric keypad and pressing the REC button.
4. Select the elements to be recorded on the VTR:

•Toggle the record elements as desired: V, K, A1, A2, A3, A4 7
Note: You cannot set the key element for recording on the VTR, since no VTR on the
planet has a key channel.
5. Set the edit IN point on the Abekas 6000 (source player):

•If not yet done, cue a valid clip on the active video channel, in
the usual manner.
position the clip on the DDR disk to edit IN point.
•Press MARK IN
7-11
Alternatively, if you know the timecode values of the mark IN point,

you may type it into the numeric keypad and use the MARK IN but-
ton to set the edit point.
The OUT point for the source DDR is automatically calculated using
the duration from the recorder. Whenever three edit points have
been specified, the fourth is automatically calculated and entered.
SrcDDR In= 00.00.00.00 Out= 00.00.05.00

RecVTR In= 01.10.12.00 Out= 01.10.17.00
6. Initiate an Auto Edit Preview (optional):

•Press Preview
When the auto edit preview is started, both the VTR and the Abekas
6000 DDR will seek to the edit preroll point and then play through
the preroll interval to the edit IN point. At the edit IN point, the VTR
switches its Bypass ON to allow the material from the Abekas 6000
to be seen and heard during the edit interval. At the edit OUT point,
the VTR turns its Bypass OFF, and will play through the postroll
interval. Preroll and postroll times for the VTR and Abekas 6000 are
set in the AUTO EDIT SETUP user menu.
The edit may be previewed as many times as desired.
7. Initiate the Auto Edit Record:

•Toggle Panel so that “VTR” is illuminated if this was not done
in step 6.
•Press REC + AUTO EDIT.
When the auto edit recording is started, both the VTR and the Abe-
kas 6000 DDR will seek to the edit preroll point and then play
through the preroll interval to the edit IN point. At the edit IN point,
the VTR begins recording the material from the Abekas 6000, for the
duration of the edit interval. At the edit OUT point, the VTR stops
recording, and will postroll for the designated postroll duration.
8. Press STOP at any time to cancel or halt the auto edit record opera-
tion.
7-12
Auto Edit
Note: When an Auto Edit event has completed, the OUT point from the previous edit is
automatically “tagged” as the IN point for the next Auto Edit event (for both the
recorder and source device).
9. Initiate an Auto Edit Review (optional):

•Press Review
The record device (VTR) seeks to the preroll point (not the IN point)
of the edit just performed and rolls through the preroll, edit interval,
and postroll. You may press the STOP button at any time to cancel
the auto edit review operation. Further, you may review the edit as
many times as desired prior to performing the next auto edit record.
Points to Know About Auto Edit

■ When recording to the Abekas 6000 in Auto Edit, you can either
record one event into an open clip ID (NewClip) or record one or
more events into an existing clip ID. When you record into an open
clip ID (NewClip), the duration of the source material from the VTR
determines the duration of the NewClip being recorded into. Only a
single Auto Edit can be made to an open clip ID (NewClip). When
you record into an existing clip ID, the duration of the selected clip
determines the “edit master” duration for the source material being
edited. One or more Auto Edit events can be recorded into an
existing clip, as long as a given edit does not extend past the last 7
frame of the selected clip on the Abekas 6000.
■ You may utilize the numeric keypad together with the MARK IN
and MARK OUT buttons to numerically “set” the edit IN and OUT
points. Type the desired timecode value into the keypad, and then
press either of the MARK buttons. Alternatively, you may press
either of the MARK buttons “on the fly” as the given transport is
playing.
■ If you wish to seek the device (DDR or VTR) to the value of the
timecode points which have already been marked, you may press
(or press and hold) the GOTO button followed by the MARK IN or
MARK OUT button.
7-13
■ Once an IN point is set for the player or recorder, you may specify a
Duration (instead of setting a Mark OUT point) by typing the
desired record duration value into the numeric keypad, and then
pressing the REC button. This action will automatically calculate and
set the timecode OUT point.
■ Whenever three edit points have been specified in an Auto Edit
event, the fourth edit point is automatically calculated and entered.
If for example, the recorder has an IN and OUT point (which creates
a duration), when the IN point on the source is entered (third edit
point), the OUT point (fourth edit point) is automatically calculated
by adding the record duration to the source IN point.
■ In order to perform an Auto Edit record or preview operation, the IN
point on both the player and the recorder must be set. Otherwise, if
the Auto Edit recording is attempted, an error message appears on
the control panel LCD display. This message is present until any
button is pressed.
SrcVTR In= Out=

Bad Edit Entry or Exit points.
■ You must enable at least one track (V, K, A1, A2, A3, or A4) on the
recording device in order for Auto Edit recording to commence.
■ The “record lockout” tab on the VTR video tape cassette must be
disabled if the VTR is set as the recorder.
■ Once the Auto Edit recording and postroll is completed, the edit
OUT point on the record and source device is automatically loaded
(tagged) into the IN point, in preparation for the next matched-
frame Auto Edit event.
■ Once some or all of the criteria are set for an Auto Edit event, if you
desire, you may temporarily turn OFF the Auto Edit function while
preserving the data entered thus far. To do so, the Enable button is
toggled to turn OFF the LEDs within the button. This action disables
the Auto Edit function, and the control panel resumes control of
only the Abekas 6000 system. Therefore, had the Panel button been
set to VTR prior to toggling the Enable button, the Panel button
reverts to the DDR setting when the Enable button is turned OFF.
When the Enable button is turned OFF, the two LEDs for the status
of the Recorder button are also both turned OFF.
7-14
External Control
External Control
This section contains information about how to control the Abekas
6000 from external devices.
The following topics are covered:
• Automation Systems
• Slo-Mo Controllers
• Edit Controllers
• Points to Know About External Control
Automation Systems
Automation Systems can control the Abekas 6000 via “louth” or “odet-
ics” RS422 serial communications protocol.
Louth
The following paragraphs describe the setup and process of controlling
the Abekas 6000 from an automation system that utilizes Louth proto-
col.
Confirm that the serial cable connection has been made between the
Abekas 6000 and the automation system, and the Master/Slave switch
above the RS422 port on the rear panel of the Abekas 6000 server chas-
sis is set to “Slave”. Refer to the Abekas 6000 Installation guide for
more information.
7
Once the cable connections have been made, you must assign the
“louth” communications protocol to the RS422 port connected to the
automation system. With this protocol, an automation system utilizing
Louth protocol that’s connected to a single RS422 port can control mul-
tiple channels on the Abekas 6000. This is similar to a Control Panel’s
ability to acquire, select, and control multiple channels (ChA through
ChH).
7-15
Note: If a Control Panel has acquired a channel, the automation system utilizing
Louth protocol cannot acquire it until it is released by the Control Panel (and vice-
versa). For example, if you are using Ch-A on the Abekas 6000 control panel to
assign”louth” protocol to RS422 port #1, and then want the external automation sys-
tem to then take control of (acquire) Ch-A, then you must first release Ch-A from the
Abekas 6000 control panel (press Exit + ChA) before the automation system can take
control of it.
Since the Abekas 6000 is a multi-channel server, one or more channels

can be controlled by an automation system utilizing Louth protocol,
and other channels can be operated from a Control Panel, Edit Control-
ler, or Slo-Mo Controller.
The “louth” protocol supports external clip selection. Therefore, the

automation system can automatically record, select, and playback clips
available on the Abekas 6000.
Configuring the RS422 Port

■ To configure an RS422 port connected to an automation system
utilizing Louth protocol:
output.

CHANNEL CONFIG
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
>RS422 PORT ASSIGN
AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
7-16
External Control
enter the sub-menu.

1 sony-slave [A] [OFF]
2 >louth [None] ON
(EXIT)
the port (RS422 port 1 through 8) which the automation system
that’s utilizing Louth protocol is connected to, and press TAKE.
4. Use the knob to select the “louth” protocol and press TAKE to
The CHNL (Channel) column will report [None] when “louth” proto-
col is assigned. Channels are assigned through the external automa- 7
tion system that’s utilizing Louth protocol.
5. Rotate the knob clockwise to select the ENBL column for the same
port and press TAKE.
6. To enable the port, rotate the knob to select ON, then press TAKE
to accept the selection.
7-17
Odetics
the Abekas 6000 with an automation system utilizing Odetics protocol.
Abekas 6000 and the automation system utilizing Odetics protocol, and
the Master/Slave switch above the RS422 port on the rear panel of the
Abekas 6000 server chassis is set to “Slave”. Refer to the Abekas 6000
Installation guide for more information.
“odetics” communications protocol to the RS422 port connected to the
automation system that’s utilizing Odetics protocol. The Abekas 6000
follows a one-to-one port/channel mapping for “sony-slave” or “odet-
ics” protocol. For example, an Odetics automation system connected to
RS422 Port#1 would control ChA (Port#2=ChB, Port#3=ChC, etc.).
The final step in controlling the Abekas 6000 is to enable RS422 com-
munications for the channel being controlled by the automation system
that’s utilizing Odetics protocol. Pressing the RS422 Remote button on
the Control Panel enables the currently active channel (ChA through
ChH) for remote control (as a slave). The RS422 Remote button is
channel-based and indicates RS422 remote status for the currently
selected channel. You must first select the channel being controlled by
the automation system, then press the RS422 Remote button (the but-
ton’s light goes ON) to enable RS422 communications to that channel.

can be controlled by an automation system utilizing Odetics protocol,
and other channels can be operated from a Control Panel, Edit Control-
ler, or Slo-Mo Controller.
The “odetics” protocol supports external clip selection. Therefore, the

automation system can automatically cue and playback any clip avail-
able on the Abekas 6000.
7-18
External Control

■ To configure an RS422 port connected to an automation system
that’s utilizing Odetics protocol:
output.

CHANNEL CONFIG
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
>RS422 PORT ASSIGN
AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
enter the sub-menu.

1 sony-slave [A] [OFF]
2 >odetics [B] [OFF]
7
(EXIT)
7-19
the port (RS422 port 1 through 8) that the automation system is con-
nected to and press TAKE.
4. Use the knob to select the “odetics” protocol and press TAKE to
The CHNL (Channel) column will report the Channel that corre-
sponds to the port number selected for control from the automation
system that’s utilizing Odetics protocol. The Abekas 6000 follows a
one-to-one port/channel mapping for “sony-slave” or “odetics” pro-
tocol. For example, an Odetics automation system connected to
RS422 Port#2 would control ChB.
RS422 Remote button is pressed on the Abekas 6000 control panel
to enable remote communications for the selected channel.
7-20
External Control
Slo-Mo Controllers
the Abekas 6000 with a Slow Motion (Slo-Mo) Controller.
Abekas 6000 and the Slo-Mo Controller, and the Master/Slave switch
more information.
“sony-slave” communications protocol to the RS422 port connected to
the Slo-Mo Controller. The Abekas 6000 follows a one-to-one port/
channel mapping for “sony-slave” or “odetics” protocol. For example, a
Slo-Mo Controller connected to RS422 Port#1 would control ChA
(Port#2=ChB, Port#3=ChC, etc.).
munications for the channel being controlled by the Slo-Mo Controller.
Pressing the RS422 Remote button on the Control Panel enables the
currently active channel (ChA through ChH) for remote control (as a
slave). The RS422 Remote button is channel based and indicates
RS422 remote status for the currently selected channel. You must first
select the channel being controlled by the Slo-Mo Controller, then
press the RS422 Remote button (the button’s light goes ON) to enable
RS422 communications to that channel.
Since the Abekas 6000 is a multi-channel server, one or more channels 7

can be controlled by a Slo-Mo Controller, and other channels can be
operated from a Control Panel, Edit Controller, or Automation System.
The “sony-slave” protocol supports external clip selection. Therefore, a

Slo-Mo Controller that supports clip ID entries can directly select any
clip ID for playback. If a Slo-Mo Controller does not support clip ID
entries, it can only control the currently cued clip on the RS422 Remote
enabled channel. If necessary, the Abekas 6000 control panel can be
used to select other clips when a channel is being controlled by a Slo-
Mo Controller without clip ID entry support.
7-21

■ To configure an RS422 port connected to a Slo-Mo Controller:
output.

CHANNEL CONFIG
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
>RS422 PORT ASSIGN
AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
enter the sub-menu.

2 odetics [B] [OFF]
(EXIT)
the port (RS422 port 1 through 8) that the Slo-Mo Controller is con-
7-22
External Control
4. Use the knob to select the “sony-slave” protocol and press TAKE to
sponds to the port number selected for control from the Slo-Mo
Controller. The Abekas 6000 follows a one-to-one port/channel
mapping for “sony-slave” or “odetics” protocol. For example, a Slo-
Mo Controller connected to RS422 Port#1 would control ChA.
7-23
Edit Controllers
the Abekas 6000 with an Edit Controller.
Confirm that the RS422 serial cable connection has been made between
the Abekas 6000 and the Edit Controller, and the Master/Slave switch
more information.
“sony-slave” communications protocol to the RS422 port connected to
the Edit Controller. The Abekas 6000 follows a one-to-one port/channel
mapping for “sony-slave” or “odetics” protocol. For example, an Edit
Controller connected to RS422 Port#1 would control ChA (Port#2=ChB,
Port#3=ChC, etc.).
munications for the channel being controlled by the edit controller.
Pressing the RS422 Remote button on the Control Panel enables the
currently active channel (ChA through ChH) for remote control (as a
slave). The RS422 Remote button is channel based and indicates
RS422 remote status for the currently selected channel. You must first
select the channel being controlled by the edit controller, then press
the RS422 Remote button (the button’s light goes ON) to enable
RS422 communications to that channel.

can be controlled by an Edit Controller, and other channels can be
operated from a Control Panel, Slo-Mo Controller, or Automation Sys-
tem.
The “sony-slave” protocol supports external clip selection. Therefore,

an Edit Controller that supports clip ID entries can directly select any
clip ID for playback. If an Edit Controller does not support clip ID
entries, it can only control the currently cued clip on the RS422 Remote
enabled channel. If necessary, the Abekas 6000 control panel can be
used to select other clips when a channel is being controlled by an Edit
Controller without clip ID entry support.
7-24
External Control
When connected to an Edit Controller, the Abekas 6000 can be a

“source” or “record” device. As a “source” device, clips recorded on the
Abekas 6000 can be used as source material in an edit event. The
desired clips would first be recalled from the Abekas 6000 control
panel, then synchronized in the edit event with the Edit Controller. As a
“record” device, a clip is cued by the Abekas 6000 control panel to be
used as the “edit master” to record program material into. The clip
duration must be long enough for the desired program length.

■ To configure an RS422 port connected to an Edit Controller:
output.

CHANNEL CONFIG
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
>RS422 PORT ASSIGN
AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
7-25
enter the sub-menu.

2 odetics [B] [OFF]
(EXIT)
the port (RS422 port 1 through 8) that the Edit Controller is con-
4. Use the knob to select the “sony-slave” protocol and press TAKE to
sponds to the port number selected for control from the Edit Con-
troller. The Abekas 6000 follows a one-to-one port/channel mapping
for “sony-slave” or “odetics” protocol. For example, an Edit Control-
ler connected to RS422 Port#1 would control ChA.
7-26
External Control
Points to Know About External Control

■ RS422 remote control and Auto Edit cannot be enabled at the same
time. When RS422 remote control is enabled (with the RS422
Remote button), it has priority over Auto Edit. If RS422 is enabled
and the Auto Edit Enable button is pressed, an error message will
appear on the LCD display. If Auto Edit is enabled and the RS422
Remote button is pressed, Auto Edit will be disabled.
7-27
GPI Control
• GPI Menu Selection

• GPI Enable On/Off
• GPI IN
• GPI OUT
The term “GPI” stands for “General Purpose Interface”, and refers to a
simple electrical method of triggering the Abekas 6000 to perform basic
transport operations, or for the Abekas 6000 to trigger external devices.
There are 16 GPI Inputs and 12 GPI Outputs on the Abekas 6000 sys-
tem. Each GPI input and output default to a given mode (i.e. PLAY>,
STOP, etc.) and channel assignment (i.e. ChA, ChB, etc.) but can be
customized to perform other functions on any combination of chan-
nels.
In order to utilize the GPI triggering capability of the Abekas 6000, a

custom GPI cable must be constructed to connect the Abekas 6000 to
external devices. Please refer to the Abekas 6000 Installation guide for
details on GPI cable pin-out requirements.
Note: When Louth protocol has taken control over a given video channel via RS422
control, then all GPI INPUTS for that channel are automatically disabled. These GPI
INPUTS are reactivated when the Louth automation system releases the video channel.
GPI Menu Selection

The GPI input and output functions are programmed through the User
Setup menu, as viewed on the status overlay display.
■ To select the GPI SETUP sub-menus:

1. Press Menu on the control panel to turn ON the user menu status
overlay display on the composite video “status” output.
7-28
GPI Control
2. Turn the rotary knob to highlight GPI SETUP:

CHANNEL CONFIG
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM STATUS
RS422 PORT ASSIGN
AUTO EDIT SETUP
REMOTE TIMING SETUP
PANEL SETUP
>GPI SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
3. Press TAKE. This selects the GPI SETUP sub-menu:
GPI SETUP (1/4)

>GPI IN ASSIGN
GPI OUT ASSIGN
GPI Enable = ON
(EXIT)
Turn the rotary knob to highlight the desired GPI SETUP sub-menu, 7
and then press TAKE to select the sub-menu. In the example above,
the GPI IN ASSIGN menu is highlighted and will be selected when
TAKE is pressed.
7-29
GPI Enable On/Off

By default, all GPI Inputs and Outputs are enabled (ON).
■ To disable the GPI Inputs and Outputs:

1. Turn the rotary knob to highlight GPI Enable:
GPI SETUP (3/4)

GPI IN ASSIGN
GPI OUT ASSIGN
>GPI Enable = ON
(EXIT)
Then press TAKE.
2. Turn the rotary knob counter-clockwise to select OFF, then press

TAKE again to turn OFF GPI Enable:
GPI SETUP (3/4)

GPI IN ASSIGN
GPI OUT ASSIGN
>GPI Enable = OFF
(EXIT)
7-30
GPI Control
GPI IN
This section describes how to set up the 16 GPI Inputs using the GPI
IN ASSIGN sub-menu. Each GPI Input must have a Channel and Mode
assigned to it. A table is provided below to describe all the GPI Input
modes available.
Channel Assignment
When using GPI inputs (1-16) on the Abekas 6000, you must assign the
desired video channel (ChA - ChH) to be triggered. All 16 GPI inputs
can be assigned to the same channel or different channels.
■ To assign a channel to a GPI input:

1. In the GPI SETUP sub-menu, turn the rotary knob to point the cur-
sor to the GPI IN ASSIGN menu label, then press TAKE.
GPI SETUP (1/4)

>GPI IN ASSIGN
GPI OUT ASSIGN
GPI Enable = ON
(EXIT)
7
2. In the GPI IN ASSIGN menu, turn the rotary knob to highlight the
CHANNEL column for the desired GPI input number, then press
TAKE. You can now change the channel assigned to the selected
GPI input. For convenience, the currently assigned mode is shown
for each GPI input.
7-31
GPI IN ASSIGN (1/33)

GPI CHANNEL MODE
>1 ChA Play >
2 None Off
3 None Off
4 None Off
5 None Off
6 None Off
7 None Off
8 None Off
9 None Off
10 None Off
11 None Off
12 None Off
13 None Off
14 None Off
15 None Off
16 None Off
(EXIT)
The rotary knob is used to change the channel assignment from the
current setting to any of the eight channels (ChA through ChH).
Turning the rotary knob counter-clockwise will eventually stop at
ChA, while turning the rotary knob clockwise will eventually stop at
ChH.
3. Once the desired channel is selected, press the TAKE button to

assign the channel to the GPI input.
Mode Assignment
In addition to assigning a channel to be triggered, you must assign a
mode (PLAY>, STOP, FREEZE ON, etc.) for each GPI input (1-16).
■ To assign a mode to a GPI input:

1. In the GPI SETUP sub-menu, turn the rotary knob to highlight the
GPI IN ASSIGN menu label, then press TAKE.
2. In the GPI IN ASSIGN menu, turn the rotary knob to highlight the
MODE column for the desired GPI input number, then press TAKE.
You can now change the mode assigned to the selected GPI input.
7-32
GPI Control
For convenience, the currently assigned channel is shown for each

GPI input.
The rotary knob is used to change the mode assignment from the
current setting to any one of the following settings:
GPI Input Mode Description
1. Off Disables the given GPI input port.
2. Play> Plays the currently cued clip in the forward direction from its current position.
3. <Play Plays the currently cued clip in the reverse direction from its current position.
4. Jog> Clip currently cued in the channel will jog forward by 1 frame (when in frame output
mode) or 1 field (when in field output mode) from current position.
5. <Jog Clip currently cued in the channel will jog reverse by 1 frame (when in frame output
mode) or 1 field (when in field output mode) from current position.
6. Stop Stops playback, record, auto edit recording, auto list advance, or any other transport
function.
7. Record Initiates recording in the video channel, using the current record duration and record
track enables.
8. Record 1-Ff Records for a duration of 1 frame at the current location on disk within the current clip.
9. Rewind Rewinds the current clip. Same as pressing REW button.
10. FFwd Fast-forwards the current clip. Same as pressing FF button.
11. Bypass On Turns the Bypass function ON.
12. Bypass Off Turns the Bypass function OFF.
13. Freeze On Turns the Freeze function ON. 7

14. Freeze Off Turns the Freeze function OFF.
15. Loop On Turns the “Loop” Play Repeat function ON.

16. Loop Off Turns the “Loop” Play Repeat function OFF.
17. P-Pong On Turns the “Ping-Pong” Play Repeat function ON.
18. P-Pong Off Turns the “Ping-Pong” Play Repeat function OFF.
19. <Clip Cues the previous clip ID, with respect to the currently cued clip ID.
20. Clip> Cues the next clip ID, with respect to the currently cued clip ID.
21. List Play Selects LIST PLAY operation. Same as pressing LIST PLAY button.
22. Clip Play Selects CLIP PLAY operation. Same as pressing CLIP PLAY button.
23. Take Same as pressing the TAKE button.
7-33

item 1 (Off), while turning the rotary knob clockwise will eventually
stop at item 23 (Take).
3. Once the desired mode is selected, press the TAKE button to assign
the mode to the GPI input.
GPI OUT
This section describes how to set up the 16 GPI Outputs using the GPI
OUT ASSIGN sub-menu. Each GPI Output must have a Channel and
Mode assigned to it. A table is provided below to describe all the GPI
Output modes available.
Channel Assignment
When using GPI outputs on the Abekas 6000, you must assign the
video channel (ChA - ChH) that will send the trigger to the GPI output
(1-12). All 12 GPI outputs can be triggered by the same channel or dif-
ferent channels.
■ To assign a channel to a GPI output:

GPI OUT ASSIGN menu label, then press TAKE.
GPI SETUP (2/4)

GPI IN ASSIGN
>GPI OUT ASSIGN
GPI Enable = ON
(EXIT)
2. In the GPI OUT ASSIGN menu, turn the rotary knob to highlight the
CHNL column for the desired GPI output number, then press TAKE.
You can now change the channel assigned to the selected GPI out-
put. For convenience, the currently assigned mode is shown for
each GPI output.
7-34
GPI Control
GPI OUT ASSIGN (1/33)

GPI CHNL MODE Timecode
1 >ChA Timecode 00.00.01.00
2 ChB Clip Start N/A
3 None Off N/A
4 None Off N/A
5 None Off N/A
6 None Off N/A
7 None Off N/A
8 None Off N/A
9 None Off N/A
10 None Off N/A
11 None Off N/A
12 None Off N/A
(EXIT)
The rotary knob is used to change the channel assignment from the
current setting to any of the eight channels (ChA through ChH).
ChA, while turning the rotary knob clockwise will eventually stop at
ChH.
3. Once the desired channel is selected, press the TAKE button to
assign the channel to the GPI output.
Mode Assignment
In addition to assigning a channel, you must assign a mode (CLIP END,
CLIP START, AT TAKE, etc.) for each GPI output being used (1-12).
7
■ To assign a mode to a GPI output:

GPI OUT ASSIGN menu label, then press TAKE.
2. In the GPI OUT ASSIGN sub-menu, turn the rotary knob to highlight
the MODE column for the desired GPI output number, then press
TAKE. You can now change the mode assigned to the selected GPI
output. For convenience, the currently assigned channel is shown
for each GPI output.
7-35
The rotary knob is used to change the mode assignment from the
current setting to any one of the following settings:
GPI Output Mode Description
1. Off Disables the individual GPI output.

2. Clip End When the end point of the clip is reached by any transport function, the GPI output is triggered
for a duration of 1 frame. This includes transport functions such as PLAY, FF, RECORD,
JOG>, etc.
3. Clip Start When the start point of the clip is reached by any transport function, the GPI output is trig-
gered for a duration of 1 frame. This includes transport functions such as PLAY, FF, RECORD,
JOG>, etc.
4. Mark In When a clip is played through the Mark IN point by any transport function, the GPI output is
triggered for a duration of 1 frame. This includes transport functions such as PLAY, FF,
RECORD, JOG>, etc.
5. Mark Out When a clip is played through the Mark OUT point by any transport function, the GPI output is
triggered for a duration of 1 frame. This includes transport functions such as PLAY, FF,
RECORD, JOG>, etc.
6. Timecode Timecode value. When this parameter is selected, the default value is 00.00.00.00 timecode.
Once this parameter is selected, an operator may highlight the Timecode column and type a
new timecode value into the numeric keypad and then press the TAKE button to change the
timecode value.
Whenever the clip is played through this timecode value, the GPI output is triggered for a
duration of 1 frame.
7. Record End When a record operation is finished, the GPI output is triggered for a duration of 1 frame.
8. Bypass On When the Bypass function is turned ON, the GPI output is triggered for a duration of 1 frame.
9. Bypass Off When the Bypass function is turned OFF, the GPI output is triggered for a duration of 1 frame.
10. Freeze On When the Freeze function is turned ON, the GPI output is triggered for a duration of 1 frame.
11. Freeze Off When the Freeze function is turned OFF, the GPI output is triggered for a duration of 1 frame.
12. At Take During LIST PLAY operation, a GPI output is triggered for a duration of 1 frame after the
TAKE button is pressed. This is only possible during LIST PLAY mode. During CLIP PLAY
mode, pressing TAKE does not issue a GPI output trigger. Likewise, any time the menu dis-
play is ON, pressing TAKE does not issue a GPI output trigger.
13. Cue Done When a Clip ID has been recalled and is finished cueing, the GPI output is triggered for a
duration of 1 frame.
14. At Failure When a system failure is detected, the GPI output is triggered for a duration of 1 frame.
7-36
GPI Control

item 1 (Off), while turning the rotary knob clockwise will eventually
stop at item 14 (At Failure).
3. Once the desired mode is selected, press the TAKE button to assign
the mode to the GPI output.
7-37
Time Delay
The Time Delay function in the Abekas 6000 is used to record an
incoming signal and simultaneously delay its playback by a preset
amount of time. It requires a pair of channels, one for recording and
the other for delayed playback. The delay range is 10:00 to 23:59:59:29,
or to the maximum “open” duration available on the server.
For example, the Time Delay function, set to a 15 minute delay, could
be used to record a 30 minute network satellite feed that starts at
10:45am and needs to be played out to air at 11:00am. The operator
would first have to configure a channel pair for Time Delay, then enter
the Time Delay mode, preset a delay time of 15 minutes, and simply
start recording the network show at any time before 10:45am. At 11am,
the network show will be available for playout from the playback
channel. Meanwhile, the satellite feed is still being recorded on the
record channel.
• Time Delay Configuration

• Time Delay Operations
Time Delay Configuration

Before entering the Time Delay mode, a pair of channels must be con-
figured for Time Delay operation. This is done with the user setup
menus. If you do not have the channels configured properly, when
you try to enter Time Delay mode, the error message “Ch not config-
ured for Time Delay” will appear in the LCD display on the control
panel.
■ To configure a channel pair for Time Delay mode:

1. Press Menu on the control panel to turn ON the user menu status
overlay.
7-38
Time Delay
2. Turn the rotary knob to highlight SYSTEM SETUP and press TAKE
to enter the SYSTEM SETUP sub-menu.
SYSTEM SETUP (2/9)

>Chnl A/B tracks = Video/Video
Net Delete = OFF
VIDEO TIMING
AUDIO SETUP
(EXIT)
3. Then rotate the knob to highlight the desired channel pair to be

configured and press TAKE.
4. Rotate the knob to select Time Delay and press TAKE to accept the
selection.
SYSTEM SETUP (2/9)

>Chnl A/B tracks = Time Delay
Net Delete = OFF
VIDEO TIMING
AUDIO SETUP 7
(EXIT)
The channel pair is now configured for Time Delay mode. The first
channel in the pair is the record channel, the second is the playback
channel. The LED under the Channel Select button for the record
channel will be bright, and the LED for the playback channel will be
dim.
5. Press Menu to toggle OFF the user menu status overlay.
7-39
Time Delay Operations

Setting up a Time Delay recording is a very simple process. First make
sure your video inputs and outputs are connected properly for the
record and playback channels and the channels are configured for
Time Delay recording. A “Time of Day” timecode source will need to
be connected to the LTC IN or the VITC on the Reference input.
■ To set up and start a Time Delay recording:

1. Press REC + CLIP PLAY to enter the Time Delay mode. The control
panel display will change as shown below:
Ch
TIME DELAY Hr Mn Sc Fr Network
Status: IDLE Delay: 01.00.00.00

The Ch/Clip ID display indicates the Time Delay record channel and
displays the “TimeDly” mode title.
The “Status” indicator in the LCD display shows “IDLE” when noth-
ing is happening (before recording is started or after it is stopped).
In the Timecode display, “PTOD” stands for “Play Time of Day”.
2. Type the desired delay value (Hours, Minutes, Seconds, Frames) on

the numeric keypad, then press the REC button. The Delay value is
displayed on the LCD display.
The delay range is 10.00 to 23.59.59.29.
3. To begin the Time Delay record/play cycle, press REC + PLAY. The
Status display changes to “RECORDING”.
When the Time Delay recording is first started, the “PTOD” indica-
tor reads “Wait”, while the Timecode display is counting down from
the set “delay” value to zero. The “down” arrow indicates that the
timecode is now decrementing.
Ch
Status: IDLE Delay: 01.00.00.00

When zero timecode is reached in the Timecode display (which

coincides with the end of the delay value), the Timecode display
then switches to an incrementing PTOD value. The “up” arrow indi-
7-40
Time Delay
cates that the timecode is now incrementing. The PTOD value is ini-
tially set as the current time of day (as read from the LTC IN,
Reference Input VITC, or internal clock—depending on the user
“system” setup) minus the delay value.
Ch
Status: REC/PLAY Delay: 01.00.00.00

The PTOD value then increments forward from this value, until
23.59.59.29 timecode is reached (24.59.59.24 in 625), at which time
the counter rolls over to 00.00.00.00 and then increments forward
from there. The PTOD value is intended to show the “Play Time of
Day” of the currently playing material—this is the time of day at
which this play material was recorded.
The Status indicator also changes to display “REC / PLAY” when the
material is recording and playing at the same time.
4. To halt the Time Delay record/play cycle:

• Press STOP + REC, or
• Press REC + STOP.
Points to Know About Time Delay Recording

• When a Time Delay recording is started, an open Clip ID is automat-
ically allocated for the recording.
• The Abekas 6000 will not start the Time Delay recording if there is
not enough record space on the drives.
• Existing Clip IDs will not get over-recorded when performing a Time
7
Delay record.
7-41
List Play
• List Play Overview

• List Play Menus
• List Play Create Operations
• List Play EDIT Operations
• List Play ON-AIR Operations
• List Play Modify Operations
• List Play File Operations
List Play Overview

The List Play function in the Abekas 6000 allows you to construct a list
of clip IDs for later playback of the clips in the order you’ve defined.
The play list itself is given a List ID that is used when storing and
recalling play lists. The List Play function utilizes its own status overlay
menu to show the status of the list. The LCD display on the control
panel is also used to show the clip ID and title of the current item in
the play list and the Timecode display shows the timecode position of
the clip that is currently playing from the list.
The list play function works on the concept of stored play list files
(accessed with a List ID) and a current “workspace” where the cur-
rently loaded play list can be modified and/or “aired”. Changes that are
made to the play list that is currently loaded into the workspace must
be saved to disk in order to make these changes permanent.
Once a play list is defined, it can be “aired” by manually or automati-

cally advancing through the play list in the “ON-AIR” mode. “Advance”
flags assigned in the LIST PLAY / EDIT menu determine whether the
play list advances automatically or manually, and whether the next list
item plays automatically or pauses, waiting to be played manually with
the TAKE button.
7-42
List Play
List Play Menus

The Abekas 6000 control panel features a LIST PLAY button that
selects the List Play mode of operation in the Abekas 6000 server.
Pressing the LIST PLAY button enables the status overlay on the com-
posite video status output. This menu display contains the menu tree
and a “workspace” display of the play list items in the currently loaded
play list. The following topics are included in this section:
• Menu Navigation
• Menu Overview
• LIST PLAY EDIT Menu: Individual Fields
• EDIT Menu Softkeys
In the List Play mode, there are three primary menu displays:
LIST PLAY - EDIT LIST PLAY - LIST FILES LIST PLAY - ON-AIR
LIST PLAY - HOME EDIT LIST PLAY - LIST FILES EDIT LIST PLAY ON-AIR
L125: L125: L125:
ListID 125 Loaded ListID 125 Loaded
Item Clip-ID Air-Dur Advnc Item Clip-ID Air-Dur Advnc Item Clip-ID Air-Dur Advnc
>--0 -Black- 00.00.00.15 H/- >--0 -Black- 00.00.00.15 H/- >--0 -Black- 00.00.00.15 H/-
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A --1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A --1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
--2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A --2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A --2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A
--3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A --3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A --3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/M --4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/M --4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/M
--5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A --5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A --5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A
--6 ----180 00.00.00.20 H/-
F1 Cut F6 Clip-ID F1 LoadList F6 --7 ----562 00.00.01.00 P/A
F2 Copy F7 AirDur F2 F7 --8 ---4500 00.00.02.45 P/M
F3 Paste F8 Play/Hold F3 DeleteList F8 --9 ---4501 00.00.02.33 P/M
F4 F9 Auto/Manual F4 F9
7
F5 ON-AIR F10 LIST FILES F5 SaveList F10 SaveList As F5 EDIT F10 LoadList
LIST PLAY - EDIT — Used to create and modify an existing play list.
LIST PLAY - LIST FILES — Used to Select and Load existing play
lists, and to Save the workspace play list.
LIST PLAY - ON-AIR — Used to present the workspace play list to

air.
7-43
The illustration below shows the menu tree for the LIST PLAY - EDIT
menu:
LIST PLAY LIST PLAY
Edit Menu On-Air Menu
LIST FILES
Menu
Menu Navigation
Press the LIST PLAY button to enable the status overlay on the com-
posite video status output.
The List Play status overlay may be set to one of three states:
Normal List Display Expanded List Display None
LIST PLAY - HOME EDIT LIST PLAY - HOME EDIT

L125: L125:
Item Clip-ID Air-Dur Advnc Item Clip-ID Air-Dur Advnc

>--0 -Black- 00.00.00.15 H/- >--0 -Black- 00.00.00.15 H/-
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A --1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
--2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A --2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A
--3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A --3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/M --4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/M
--5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A --5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A
--6 ----180 00.00.00.20 H/-
F1 Cut F6 Clip-ID --7 ----562 00.00.01.00 P/A
F2 Copy F7 AirDur --8 ---4500 00.00.02.45 P/M
F3 Paste F8 Play/Hold --9 ---4501 00.00.02.33 P/M
F4 F9 Auto/Manual -10 --19924 00.00.01.00 P/A
F5 ON-AIR F10 LIST FILES END
POWER POWER POWER
SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP

■ Normal List Display — Displays the Menu name and List ID, a partial
view of the loaded list (6 list items), and the Softkey Labels.
■ Expanded List Display — Displays the Menu name and List ID, and
a full screen view of the loaded list (12 list items).
■ None — No status overlay is displayed. Allows you to see the
complete video output.
Press the Menu button to toggle the status overlay between the three
ON and OFF states (Normal List Display, Expanded List Display, and
None).
To access a sub-menu, return to the top level menu by pressing the

Exit button, then press the Softkey button (F1 through F10) for the
7-44
List Play
desired sub-menu. To exit a sub-menu, press the Exit button on the

control panel.
Press CLIP PLAY to return to Clip Play mode and remove the List Play
menu from the status monitor.
Menu Overview
Press the LIST PLAY button to access the LIST PLAY home menu. If the
menu does not appear, toggle the Menu button to display the LIST
PLAY menu.
Normal List Display Expanded List Display
1 L125: 1 L125:

>--0 -Black- 00.00.00.15 H/- >--0 -Black- 00.00.00.15 H/-
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A --1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
--2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A --2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A
2 --3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A 2 --3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/M --4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/M
--5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A --5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A
--6 ----180 00.00.00.20 H/-
F1 Cut F6 Clip-ID --7 ----562 00.00.01.00 P/A
F2 Copy F7 AirDur --8 ---4500 00.00.02.45 P/M
3 F3 Paste F8 Play/Hold --9 ---4501 00.00.02.33 P/M
F4 F9 Auto/Manual -10 --19924 00.00.01.00 P/A
F5 ON-AIR F10 LIST FILES END
The LIST PLAY - EDIT status overlay menu has three major compo-
nents that appear when this menu is selected on the Abekas 6000 con-
trol panel, as shown above in the menu on the left.
While the LIST PLAY modes are active, it’s possible to turn OFF the 7
Softkey Label portion of the menu display by toggling the Menu but-
ton. This action toggles the Softkey Label portion of the menu display,
as shown above in the menu on the right. Notice that the List Items
portion of the display expands and the softkeys are hidden from view.
Even though the Softkey Labels are not in view, they remain active dur-
ing List Play “Edit” mode. During List Play “On-Air” mode, the softkeys
are no longer active, except for F5 EDIT and F10 LoadList.
Major display blocks shown in the LIST PLAY menu:
Menu Title — displays the menu or sub-menu that is selected. Also

displays the list ID# of the currently loaded workspace play list.
1
7-45
List Items — displays the list items in the currently loaded play list.
2 When the Menu button is pressed or when “On-Air” mode is
selected, this display expands, covering up the softkey labels.
Softkey Labels — displays the labels for the ten softkeys. When the
Menu button is pressed or when “On-Air” mode is selected, the
3
softkey label section is covered up by the expanded list display.
LIST PLAY EDIT Menu: Individual Fields
Normal List Display Expanded List Display

1 LIST PLAY - HOME EDIT 1 LIST PLAY - HOME EDIT
2 L125: 2 L125:
3 ListID 125 Loaded 3 ListID 125 Loaded
4 Item Clip-ID Air-Dur Advnc 4 Item Clip-ID Air-Dur Advnc
5 >--0 -Black- 00.00.00.15 H/- 5 >--0 -Black- 00.00.00.15 H/-
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A --1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
6 --2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A --2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A
--3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A --3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/M 6 --4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/M
--5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A --5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A
--6 ----180 00.00.00.20 H/-
F1 Cut F6 Clip-ID --7 ----562 00.00.01.00 P/A
F2 Copy F7 AirDur --8 ---4500 00.00.02.45 P/M
7 --9 ---4501 00.00.02.33 P/M
F3 Paste F8 Play/Hold
F4 F9 Auto/Manual -10 --19924 00.00.01.00 P/A
F5 ON-AIR F10 LIST FILES 8 END
Menu Title Area — displays the title for the selected List Play
menu.
1
List ID — displays the List ID of the currently loaded list in the edit
workspace.
2
Temporary Messages — displays temporary status messages (in

parenthesis). If no message is displayed, then the black background
3
is not shown.
List Column Headings — displays column headings for list items.

4
Item — this column shows the items from item 0 (always a black
slide) to item 999. The leading numerals in the item number are
shown as a dash (“-”).
Clip-ID — this column shows the 7-digit clip ID for the item in the
play list. “BLACK” indicates a black slide. Any item can become a
black slide by specifying the clip ID as number “0”.
7-46
List Play
Air-Dur — this column shows the duration of the clip that’s pro-
grammed into the play list item. The numerals in the “Air-Dur” value
indicate Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames. By default, when a clip is
inserted into the play list (without any mark IN or mark OUT
points), the total duration of the clip is displayed in the “Air Dura-
tion” column. In other words, if the clip is 5:15 long, then its default
air duration will also be 5:15 long.
Advnc — the “Advance” column displays two values: the “Play/

Hold” flag, and the “Auto/Manual” flag. The Play/Hold flag deter-
mines if the item will be played (P) or paused (H) when the item is
“taken” during the “On-Air” playback of the list. The Auto/Manual
flag determines (once the current item’s air duration has completed)
if the list advances to the next item automatically (A) or manually
(M) by pressing the TAKE button.
Item “>” Cursor — points to the currently selected item in the play
list that’s loaded into the workspace.
5
Play List Items — up to 999 items in a play list (1000, if you count
item “0”). The Normal List Display shows up to six items at a time in
6
the currently loaded play list, while the Expanded List Display
shows up to twelve items at a time.
Softkey Labels — displays the parameters assigned to the softkeys

(F1 through F10) on the control panel. These labels change accord-
7
ing to the menu selected.
END Marker — indicates the end of the play list. The item cursor
8
(>) can be placed on the END item so that new items can be 7
appended to the end of the play list. After the append operation is
completed, the item cursor (>) remains on the END item.
7-47
EDIT Menu Softkeys

The LIST PLAY - EDIT Menu Softkeys (F1 through F10) are used to edit
lists in the List Play workspace and select other List Play sub-menus.
F1 Cut F6 ClipID
F2 Copy F7 AirDur
F4 F9 Auto/Manual
F5 ON-AIR F10 LIST FILES
■ F1 Cut — removes the currently selected item from the play list.
Stores the item in a buffer so that it can be pasted back elsewhere
into the list.
■ F2 Copy — copies the currently selected item in the play list to a
storage buffer so that it can be pasted elsewhere into the list.
■ F3 Paste — inserts the item placed in the storage buffer (by using
Cut or Copy) into the list after the currently highlighted item.
■ F5 ON-AIR — toggles list play between “Edit” mode and “On-Air”
mode. In Edit mode, when the TAKE button is pressed, the clip in
the current item (denoted by the ">" cursor) will re-cue to its marked
IN point, and will then immediately play forward. Transport controls
can also be used to view the selected items. In On-Air mode, when
the TAKE button is pressed, list items are played according to their
Clip Play and List Advance flags.
ON-AIR MENU
LIST PLAY ON-AIR
L125:
ListID 125 Loaded
Item Clip-ID Air-Dur Advnc
>--0 -Black- 00.00.00.15 H/-
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
--2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A
--3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/M
--5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A
--6 ----180 00.00.00.20 H/-
--7 ----562 00.00.01.00 P/A
--8 ---4500 00.00.02.45 P/M
--9 ---4501 00.00.02.33 P/M
F5 EDIT F10 LoadList
While the LIST PLAY - ON-AIR menu is active, toggling the Menu
button causes the menu display to turn OFF and ON, but does not
7-48
List Play
alter the operations of the ON-AIR mode. This allows you to see the
video behind the menu display.
You can exit the LIST PLAY - ON-AIR menu by several methods: By
pressing the F5 EDIT softkey; Pressing the Exit button; Pressing the
CLIP PLAY button then the LIST PLAY button; Pressing Shift + LIST
PLAY. Any of these actions will return the menu display to the LIST
PLAY - EDIT menu.
■ F6 ClipID — changes the Clip ID of the selected item in the list.

Press F6 ClipID after typing a value in the numeric keypad to
change the Clip ID for the currently selected item in the list.
■ F7 Air-Dur — sets the length of time the clip will play. Press F7
Air-Dur after typing a value at the numeric keypad. The Air
Duration is shown in the Air Duration column for each clip in the
list. The default Air Duration is the recorded length of the clip.
If the Air Duration is shorter than the clip length, the clip will play
for the period of the air duration and truncate the end of the clip. If
the Air Duration is longer than the clip length, the clip will play to
its end and freeze on the last frame for the remaining period of the
Air Duration.
The Air Duration can also be modified by using the MARK IN and
MARK OUT buttons to designate a segment within the clip for play-
back.
■ F8 Play/Hold — sets a Play or Hold flag for the selected clip in the
play list. A (P) will be displayed in the “Advnc” column when a clip
has been designated to Play. This play list item will play 7
automatically after it is cued. An (H) will be displayed in the
“Advnc” column when a clip has been designated to Hold. When
this play list item is cued, it holds playback until the TAKE button is
pressed.
■ F9 Auto/Manual — sets an Auto or Manual advance flag for the
selected clip in the play list. The “Advnc” column will display an (A)
when a list item is set to Auto advance. When a list item set to Auto
advance finishes playing, the next item in the list will automatically
cue. The “Advnc” column will display an (M) when a list item is set
to Manual advance. When a list item set to Manual advance finishes
playing, it will freeze on the last frame. To cue the next item in the
play list, you must press the TAKE button.
7-49
■ F10 LIST FILES — selects the List Files sub-menu. This menu is
used to load, save, and delete play list files.
LIST FILES MENU LIST FILES MENU - Expanded
LIST PLAY - LIST FILES EDIT LIST PLAY - LIST FILES EDIT
L125: L125:
ListID 125 Loaded ListID 125 Loaded
>--0 -Black- 00.00.00.15 H/- >--0 -Black- 00.00.00.15 H/-
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A --1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
--2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A --2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A
--3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A --3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/M --4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/M
--5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A --5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A
--6 ----180 00.00.00.20 H/-
F1 LoadList F6 --7 ----562 00.00.01.00 P/A
F2 F7 --8 ---4500 00.00.02.45 P/M
F3 DeleteList F8 --9 ---4501 00.00.02.33 P/M
F4 F9 -10 --19924 00.00.01.00 P/A
F5 SaveList F10 SaveList As END
While the LIST PLAY - LIST FILES menu is active, toggling the Menu
button removes the Softkey Labels and expands the List Items dis-
play. Even though the Softkey Labels are not in view, they remain
active during List Play “List Files” mode. Toggling the Menu button
again turns OFF the menu display.
Press the Exit button to return the menu display to the LIST PLAY -
EDIT menu.
F1 LoadList — used to load a list ID from memory into the Play

List workspace for playback or editing. Press F1 LoadList after typ-
ing a list ID number at the numeric keypad to load the desired list. If
no List ID number is entered, pressing F1 LoadList will re-load the
currently loaded List ID.
F3 DeleteList — used to delete a list ID from memory. Press F1

DeleteList after typing a list ID number at the numeric keypad to
delete the desired list.
F5 SaveList — used to save the current list in the Play List work-
space to memory. Press F5 SaveList to save the current list to the
same list ID#.
F10 SaveList As — used to save the current list in the Play List
workspace to a different list ID# in memory. Type a new list ID#
into the numeric keypad, then press F10 SaveList As to save the
current list to that list ID#.
7-50
List Play
List Play Create Operations

• Recalling a Play List

• Creating a Play List
• Inserting a Clip ID into a Specific Place in the Play List
• Inserting a Clip with Marked IN and OUT Points into the Play List
• Inserting Items at "Item 0" in the Play List
• Inserting Items at the END of the Play List
• Inserting Clip ID Placeholders into a Play List
You can create a list of clips while in the Clip Play mode of operation,
by using the Insert button on the control panel. The Clip ID that's cur-
rently cued in the active channel is the clip that's inserted into the play
list when the Insert button is pressed. In addition, you can also define
Mark IN and Mark OUT points within the clip prior to inserting the Clip
ID into the play list. When this clip is played in LIST PLAY ON-AIR
mode, the playback is restricted between the marked IN and OUT
points.
You can also insert clip ID's that do not yet exist into a play list. This
allows a play list to be created before the actual clips are recorded or
edited into the server. These clip ID's act as "placeholders" for the
material that's not yet produced, but later need to be presented in the
play list.
7
New items can be inserted into the play list from either the CLIP PLAY
mode (while the CLIP PLAY button is active), or from the LIST PLAY /
EDIT or LIST PLAY / ON-AIR menus.
Recalling a Play List

The first step to inserting items into a play list is to first recall an exist-
ing play list or define a new play list. Please refer to “List Play File
Operations” on page 7-80 for more information on loading and saving
play lists.
■ To recall a play list while in CLIP PLAY mode:

1. Type the number of the desired play list into the numeric keypad.
7-51
2. Press the LIST PLAY button. This action only recalls the requested
play list, and the LIST PLAY mode is not selected. When the list is
recalled, a message "List 1234 Recalled" appears centered in the LCD
display on the Abekas 6000 control panel, as well as on the status
output if the "Menu" overlay is turned ON.
■ To recall a play list from the LIST PLAY / EDIT menu:
1. Press the LIST PLAY button to select LIST PLAY mode.
2. Press F10 LIST FILES softkey in the LIST PLAY / EDIT menu to
bring up the LIST PLAY / LIST FILES sub-menu.
3. Type the number of the desired play list into the numeric keypad.
4. Press F1 LoadList softkey in the LIST PLAY / LIST FILES sub-
menu to recall an existing play list or to define a new play list.
The recalled list is displayed in the Play List display on the status
monitor. A message will be displayed above the Play List workspace
and on the LCD display on the control panel indicating which List
ID has been loaded. An empty list is shown below:
LIST PLAY - HOME EDIT

L--1:
ListID 1 Loaded
>--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
END
(This LIST is EMPTY)
F1 LoadList F6
F2 F7
F3 DeleteList F8
F4 F9
F5 SaveList F10 SaveList As
Note: By default, all lists start with item “0”, which is a cut to black. It is assigned to
Hold (H) and Manual (M) advance so that when the list is loaded, black will cue to
the output channel and the TAKE button must be pressed to start playing the list.
7-52
List Play
■ To recall the previous or next play list:

1. Press and hold LIST PLAY + ! to select List Play mode and recall
the next List ID. Press and hold LIST PLAY + " to select List Play
mode and recall the previous List ID.
The recalled list is displayed in the Play List workspace on the status
monitor.
Creating a Play List

When creating a list, the numerical order of clip IDs does not matter.
The clips can be placed anywhere in the list according to the order you
want to play them. You can also repeat the playback of clips, using the
same clip any number of times.
■ To create a new list:

1. Recall an empty list using the steps described previously.
2. Use one of the following options to select a clip and insert it into the
list:
• If you want to load the currently cued Clip ID, just press the
Insert button.
• If you know the Clip ID you want to insert but it is not currently
cued, enter the ClipID on the numeric keypad, then press the
Insert button.
• If you want to view a clip before inserting it, cue the clip by enter-
ing the Clip ID on the numeric keypad and pressing the CLIP ID
button. View the clip using the transport control buttons and jog/ 7
shuttle knob. Press the Insert button to insert it into the list.
• You can also press CLIP PLAY to get back to Clip Play mode. You
can cue clips by entering their Clip IDs on the numeric keypad
and pressing the CLIP ID button, or use the ! and " keys to cue
the next or previous Clip ID. When you’ve found the clip you
want, press the Insert button. When you press LIST PLAY, the
clip will be displayed in the Play List workspace.
When you press the Insert button, the clip will cue and appear as
the next item in the list (appended to the previous item inserted). A
message will be displayed above the Play List workspace and on the
LCD display on the control panel indicating which clip has been
inserted.
7-53
The Play List workspace displays the inserted items and their
attributes. The recorded duration of the clip is initially displayed in
the Air-Dur (Air Duration) column.

L125:
(Clip ID 213 inserted at 3)
--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
--2 -175601 00.00.00.30 P/A
>--3 ----213 00.00.00.30 P/A
END
F1 Cut F6 Clip-ID
F2 Copy F7 AirDur
F4 F9 Auto/Manual
3. Repeat step 2 to insert additional clips into the play list.
Note: For the first item inserted into an empty list, the “Advance” flags will always
default to Play (P) and Auto (A), respectively. The rest of the inserted items will carry
the same flags from the previously selected item in the list.
Hint: When you are done creating a play list, it should be saved to memory. For
details on saving lists, refer to “List Play File Operations” on page 7-80
7-54
List Play
Inserting a Clip ID into a Specific Place in the Play List

You can specify where a new clip is inserted into the play list by first
navigating to the desired location, and then using the Insert button to
insert the new clip after the highlighted item in the list.
■ To insert a clip ID into a specific place in the play list:

1. Select the LIST PLAY mode by pressing the LIST PLAY button.
2. Press the ! or " button to move the current item ">" cursor to the
desired location in the play list. For example, the cursor is moved to
item 2 in the following play list (A):
(A) (B)
L125: L125:
--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
--2 -175601 00.00.00.30 P/A
>--2 -175601 00.00.00.30 P/A
>--3 ---1875 00.00.01.10 P/A
--3 ----213 00.00.00.30 P/A
--4 ----213 00.00.00.30 P/A
END
END
F1 Cut F6 Clip-ID F1 Cut F6 Clip-ID

F2 Copy F7 AirDur F2 Copy F7 AirDur
F3 Paste F8 Play/Hold F3 Paste F8 Play/Hold
F4 F9 Auto/Manual F4 F9 Auto/Manual
F5 ON-AIR F10 LIST FILES F5 ON-AIR F10 LIST FILES
7
3. Select the CLIP PLAY mode by pressing the CLIP PLAY button.
4. Cue the desired Clip ID into the current play channel, using any
means desired.
5. Press the Insert button, then press LIST PLAY to return to LIST
PLAY EDIT mode. This action places the currently cued Clip ID into
the play list, after the current item ">" cursor location in the play list.
In the example menu display (B) above, clip ID 1875 is inserted
after the original item 2. Notice that the current item ">" cursor is
placed on the new item, which was renumbered as item #3 after the
insert operation. This action allows a series of items to be inserted
into the play list in the order that the items are entered.
7-55
Inserting a Clip with Marked IN and OUT Points into the Play List
After a clip is recorded in Clip Play mode, you can use the MARK IN
and MARK OUT buttons to designate a segment within the clip. When
the clip is added to the play list and played to “air” (in ON-AIR mode),
the clip will play from its marked IN point to its marked OUT point.
■ To insert a clip with a marked segment into the play list:

1. Select CLIP PLAY mode by pressing the CLIP PLAY button.
2. Cue the desired Clip ID into the current play channel.
3. Play the clip to the desired mark IN point.
4. Press the MARK IN button.
5. Play the clip to the desired mark OUT point.
6. Press the MARK OUT button.
7. Press the Insert button. This action will place the currently cued
clip ID with its mark IN and OUT points into the play list, after the
current item ">" cursor location in the play list.
Note: The IN and OUT points are not shown in the play list display. However, while in
the List Play EDIT mode, you can seek to the IN and OUT points within the item by
pressing GOTO then pressing the MARK IN or MARK OUT button.
Inserting Items at "Item 0" in the Play List

The "Item 0" marker in the play list indicates the start of the play list,
and is considered to be located before the first "real" item in the play
list. It's possible to place the item selection ">" cursor on the "Item 0"
marker, but it's not possible to insert any items before "Item 0".
After this particular insert operation is completed, the item ">" cursor
moves down to the newly inserted item in the list, so that if additional
items are inserted into the list, they will appear in the play list in the
order defined.
7-56
List Play
■ To insert an item at “Item 0” in the play list:

1. Place the item ">" cursor on Item “0” (A):
(A) (B)
L125: L125:
>--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M --0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A >--1 ----286 00.00.00.15 P/A
--2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A --2 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
END --3 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A
END

2. Insert a new item (Clip ID 286) into the play list (B). This places the
new item just after "Item 0", and moves the item ">" cursor to the
newly inserted item 1. The original two items (1) and (2) are renum-
bered to become (2) and (3), respectively.
3. The next insert operation (clip ID 4230) will be inserted as the item
before item (2), in the usual manner:
Item
--0
Clip-ID
-BLACK-
Air-Dur
00.00.00.00
Advnc
H/M
7
--1 ----286 00.00.00.15 P/A
>--2 ---4230 00.00.00.15 P/A
--3 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A
END
7-57
Inserting Items at the END of the Play List

The END marker in the play list indicates the end of the list, and is con-
sidered to be located after the last "real" item in the list. It's possible to
place the item selection ">" cursor on the END item so that new items
can be appended to the end of the play list. In such a case, after the
append operation is completed the item ">" cursor moves off the END
item, and is placed on the newly inserted item.
Note: Whenever the item selection ">" cursor is placed on the END item, the video out-
put on the selected channel changes to BLACK.
■ To insert an item at the END of the play list:

1. Place the item ">" cursor on the END item (A):
(A) (B)
L125: L125:
--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M --0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A --1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
--2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A --2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A
>END >--3 ----286 00.00.00.15 P/A
END

2. Insert a new item (Clip ID 286) into the play list (B). This action
places the new item just prior to the END item, and places the item
">" cursor on this newly inserted item. The video output changes to
show the contents of this new item.
7-58
List Play
Inserting Clip ID Placeholders into a Play List

Clip ID's that do not yet exist can be inserted into a play list. This
allows a play list to be created before the actual clips are recorded or
edited into the server. These clip ID's act as “placeholders” for the
material that's not yet produced, but later need to be presented in the
play list. The “placeholder” clip ID is reported as “Missing” in the Air
Duration column, until material has been recorded into that clip ID (in
Clip Play mode).
■ To insert a clip ID placeholder into a play list:

1. Select the LIST PLAY mode by pressing the LIST PLAY button.
2. Press the ! or " button to move the current item ">" cursor to the
desired location in the play list. For example, the cursor is moved to
item 2 in the following play list (A):
(A) (B)
L125: L125:
--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
--2 -175601 00.00.00.30 P/A
>--2 -175601 00.00.00.30 P/A
>--3 ---1875 * Missing P/A
--3 ----213 00.00.00.30 P/A
--4 ----213 00.00.00.30 P/A
END
END
F1 Cut F6 Clip-ID F1 Cut F6 Clip-ID 7

3. Type the desired “placeholder” clip ID into the numeric keypad.

4. Press the Insert button. The “placeholder” Clip ID is inserted into
the play list after the current item ">" cursor location. In the example
menu display (B) above, clip ID 1875 is inserted after the original
item 2. The Air-Dur column displays the clip ID as “Missing” until
material is recorded into that clip ID (in the Clip Play mode).
7-59
List Play EDIT Operations

Once a play list is created in the edit workspace, the transport control
buttons and functions may be used to affect the playback of the current
clip in the play list. In the EDIT mode, the behavior of the transport
buttons act in a particular way.
The following topics are included in this section:
• Navigating the Play List in EDIT Mode

• Transport Control of List Items in EDIT Mode
Navigating the Play List in EDIT Mode

When a new play list is created or an existing play list is loaded, it is
important to know how to quickly navigate through it to find specific
list items that need checking or modifying. This section describes how
to quickly scroll through a list or seek directly to list items or clip IDs.
■ Use the following options to scroll through list items:

• Press the ! or " buttons to scroll up or down through the list,
one item at a time. When an item is highlighted, it will cue auto-
matically.
• Press and hold CLIP ID while rotating the Knob to quickly scroll
through clips in a play list. While the CLIP ID button is held
down, the Shuttle, Jog, and Var Play buttons are all disabled.
When the CLIP ID button is released, the Shuttle, Jog, and Var
Play buttons are activated again.
■ Using the ENTER button to cue to a specific list item:
1. Type the item number (not the clip ID) that you want to cue with
the numeric keypad.
2. Press the ENTER button. The selected item will be highlighted in
the Play List workspace and the corresponding clip will be cued.
Note: If the ENTER button is pressed without first making a numeric entry (the
numeric entry is blank), the clip does not play, nor does the list item advance.
7-60
List Play
■ Using the TAKE button to cue to a specific list item:

the numeric keypad.
2. Press the TAKE button. The selected item will be highlighted in the
Play List workspace. This action only seeks to the item number in
the play list, it does not cause the list item to play or to advance. If
you wish to do so, then a second press of the TAKE button is
required.
■ Using the CLIP ID button to cue to a matching clip ID #:

• Type a clip ID number into the numeric keypad and then press
the CLIP ID button to seek to the next item in the play list that has
a matching clip ID. If a matching clip ID is not found, then the
menu display returns the message:
Could not find ClipID.
This action will always look forward in the play list. If a matching
itme is not found from the current position in the list, to the end
of the list, then the process looks at item 0 and then forward from
there.
Transport Control of List Items in EDIT Mode

In EDIT mode you can use the TAKE button and the standard transport
controls to view the currently selected list item. These functions allows
you to review a clip’s content or search for new Mark IN or Mark OUT
points.
7
■ Using the TAKE Button in EDIT Mode:
• Any time the TAKE button is pressed while in the list play EDIT
mode, the clip in the current item (denoted by the ">" cursor) will
re-cue to its marked IN point, and will then immediately play for-
ward to 1-frame before the OUT point. Once that point is reached,
clip playback stops.
• Pressing the TAKE button while the clip in the list item is already
playing will result in the same action described above.
• Pressing the TAKE button will never advance the ">" cursor to the
next item while in the List Play EDIT mode.
7-61
■ $ Button in EDIT Mode:

Using the PLAY$
What happens when the PLAY$$ button is pressed while in the list
play EDIT mode depends upon the current timecode position within
the clip, as follows:
• If the current position is at the marked IN point, or between the IN

and OUT points pressing the PLAY$ $ button will cause the clip to
play forward from the current position to the point that is 1-frame
before the marked OUT point. At that point, the clip will stop
playback.
• If the current disk position is prior to the marked IN point, the
PLAY$ $ button will act the same as above.
• If the clip is parked at the 1-frame prior to the marked OUT point,
pressing the PLAY$ $ button will cause the clip to play forward
from that point. Clip playback will stop when the clip reaches the
physical end of clip.
$ button will never advance to the next or pre-
• Pressing the PLAY$
vious list item.
■ Using the #PLAY Button in EDIT Mode:
What happens when the #PLAY button is pressed while in the list
play EDIT mode depends upon the current timecode position within
the clip, as follows:
• If the current position is at the marked OUT point, or between the

IN and OUT points, pressing the #PLAY button will cause the clip
to play backward from the current position to the marked IN
point. At the IN point, clip playback will stop.
• If the current disk position is after to the marked OUT point, the
#PLAY button will act the same as above.
• If the clip is parked at the marked IN point, pressing the #PLAY
button will cause the clip to play backward from that point. Clip
playback will stop when the clip reaches the physical start of clip.
• Pressing the #PLAY button will never advance to the next or pre-
vious list item.
■ Using the #JOG and JOG$
$ Buttons in EDIT Mode:
These buttons behave in the normal manner. When the physical

beginning or end of the clip has been reached, clip motion will stop.
7-62
List Play
■ Using the ##REW

## $$ buttons in EDIT mode
and FF$$
These buttons behave in the normal manner. When the physical

beginning or end of the clip has been reached, clip motion will stop.
■ Using the Var Play & Shuttle functions on the rotary knob in EDIT
mode
These buttons behave in the normal manner. Winding the rotary

knob will begin playback, starting from 0.00 play speed. When the
physical beginning or end of the clip has been reached, clip motion
will stop.
7-63
List Play ON-AIR Operations

Once a play list is created, you can present the play list to air by using
a combination of the TAKE button and, if desired, use the transport
control buttons to control the playback of the play list.
• Presenting a Play List in ON-AIR Mode

• Navigating the Play List in ON-AIR Mode
• Transport Control of List Items in ON-AIR Mode
The LIST PLAY / ON-AIR menu display has only two major compo-
nents that appear when this function is selected on the Abekas 6000
control panel, as shown below:
LIST PLAY ON-AIR

1 L12:

>--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
--2 ---8500 00.00.00.30 P/A
--3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/M
--5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A
2
--6 ----180 00.00.00.20 P/A
--7 ----562 00.00.01.00 P/A
--8 ---4500 00.00.02.45 P/M
--9 ---4501 00.00.02.33 P/M
F5 EDIT F10 LoadList

3
The major components of the LIST PLAY / ON-AIR menu display:
1. Menu Title — This portion of the menu display indicates the title of
the menu or sub-menu that is selected. Also shown is the list ID #
and title of the currently loaded workspace play list.
2. List Items — This portion of the menu display shows the items in
the play list that's currently loaded into the list workspace. When the
MENU button is toggled, the entire menu display turns OFF or ON.
7-64
List Play
3. Softkey Labels — This portion of the display shows the labels for
the two active softkeys. When the MENU button is toggled, the
entire menu display turns OFF or ON.
Unlike the LIST PLAY / EDIT and LIST PLAY / LIST FILES menus,
the LIST PLAY / ON-AIR menu only has softkey F5 and F10 active.
All other softkeys are inactive and have no function.
You can exit the LIST PLAY / ON-AIR menu by any one of the follow-
ing methods:
• Press the Exit button.

• Press SHIFT + LIST PLAY buttons.
• Press the CLIP PLAY button and then press the LIST PLAY button.
• Press softkey F5 EDIT.
Any of these actions exit the On-Air mode, and selects the List Play
"EDIT" mode of operation. The menu display shows the LIST PLAY /
EDIT menu.
Presenting a Play List in ON-AIR Mode

Selecting the LIST PLAY / ON-AIR menu not only selects a new menu,
it also places the machine into a special list play mode that allows you
to present the items in the play list to the currently selected video
channel.
While ON-AIR mode is selected, the TAKE button is used to advance

the items in the play list, according to the "Advance" flags stored with
each list item. Only softkeys F5 and F10 are active. All other softkeys 7
are inactive and have no function.
1. From the EDIT mode, press softkey F5 ON-AIR to select the ON-AIR
mode. This action places the Abekas 6000 into a special mode of
operation to “air” the currently loaded play list. Which ever item is
currently selected in the EDIT mode is now ready to be "taken" in
the ON-AIR mode.
While the ON-AIR mode is active, the LED below the TAKE button
flashes GREEN when the next item in the play list is ready to be
"taken" to air. While a clip is playing, the LED glows a steady
GREEN.
7-65
2. Select the starting point of the list:

• To start from the beginning (first clip), press 1 on the numeric
keypad followed by the ENTER button. The first item of the list
will be cued.
• To start the list in black (item 0) instead of the first item in the list,
press 0 on the numeric keypad followed by the ENTER button.
• To start at a specific item number in the list, enter the item num-
ber on the numeric keypad followed by the ENTER button. The
selected item will be cued.
numeric entry is blank), the clip does not play, nor does the list item advance when
the ENTER button is pressed.
For more information on locating specific list items or clip IDs in a

play list, please refer to “Navigating the Play List in ON-AIR Mode”
on page 7-67
3. Press the TAKE button to advance the first item in the play list. Typ-
ically, the item cued in the play list will be parked on the first frame
of the clip, or at the market IN point (if an IN point has been
marked in the item). When the TAKE button is pressed, the clip
begins playback. The LED below the TAKE button glows steadily
during the clip play. When the item reaches the end, the system
looks at the "advance" flag in the current item to determine what to
do next:
• If the 'Advance' flag is set to "A" (for Auto), then the next item is
automatically taken.
• If the 'Advance' flag is set to "M" (for Manual), then the clip parks
at the end of the current item — which can be either the physical
end of the clip if no "OUT" point was marked, or at 1 frame prior
to the marked "OUT" point if an "OUT" point was marked.
4. When the next item in the play list is taken (either manually or auto-
matically), what happens next is determined by the other "Advance"
flag in the next item:
• If the 'Advance' flag is set to "P" (for Play), then the next item
automatically plays when it's taken.
• If the 'Advance' flag is set to "H" (for Hold), then the clip parks at
the start of the item — which can be either the "physical start" of
7-66
List Play
the clip if no "IN" point was marked, or at the marked "IN" point if
an "IN" point was marked.
Hint: The “Advance” flags play an important role in how a list plays back. A list can
be set up to play from start to end automatically or to stop after certain list items,
resuming playback manually.
■ Using the TAKE Button during List playback:

• If the TAKE button is pressed while an item is still playing, the
system immediately cues to the next item in the play list. The new
item will either automatically play if its "Advance" flag is set to "P",
or will pause on the IN point (or first frame) of the clip if its
"Advance" flag is set to "H". If the last clip was playing when the
TAKE button was pressed, then the clip would simply continue to
play.
■ Pausing a List During Playback:
• Press the STOP button to halt playback.
• Press TAKE to resume playback.
Navigating the Play List in ON-AIR Mode

It is important to know how to quickly navigate through a list to review
list items before playing it to “air”. This section describes how to
quickly scroll through a list or seek directly to list items or clip IDs.
■ Use the following options to scroll through list items: 7

• Press the ! or " buttons to scroll up or down through the list,
one item at a time. When an item is highlighted, it will cue auto-
matically.
• Press and hold CLIP ID while rotating the Knob to quickly scroll
through clips in a play list. While the CLIP ID button is held
down, the Shuttle, Jog, and Var Play buttons are all disabled.
When the CLIP ID button is released, the Shuttle, Jog, and Var
Play buttons are activated again.
7-67
■ Using the ENTER button to cue to a specific list item:

the numeric keypad.
2. Press the ENTER button. The selected item will be highlighted in
the Play List workspace and the corresponding clip will be cued.
numeric entry is blank), the clip does not play, nor does the list item advance when
the ENTER button is pressed.
■ Using the TAKE button to cue to a specific list item:

the numeric keypad.
2. Press the TAKE button. The selected item will be highlighted in the
Play List workspace. This action only seeks to the item number in
the play list, it does not cause the list item to play or to advance. If
you wish to do so, then a second press of the TAKE button is
required.
■ Using the CLIP ID button to cue to a matching clip ID #:

• Type a clip ID number into the numeric keypad and then press
the button to seek to the next item in the play list that has a
matching clip ID. If a matching clip ID is not found, then the
menu display returns the message:
Could not find ClipID.
This action will always look forward in the play list. If a matching
itme is not found from the current position in the list, to the end
of the list, then the process looks at item 0 and then forward from
there.
7-68
List Play
Transport Control of List Items in ON-AIR Mode

Transport control of list items is limited in ON-AIR mode compared to
EDIT mode. Only the PLAY$ $ and STOP transport control buttons are
active in this mode. This is to prevent accidents while a list is playing
to “air”.
■ Using the PLAY$ $ Button in ON-AIR Mode

• What happens when the PLAY$ $ button is pressed while in the
List Play ON-AIR mode depends upon what's happening with the
current list item:
$ button
• If the clip is already playing forward, pressing the PLAY$
will advance the play list to the next item.
• If the clip is stopped because the STOP button had been pressed
to halt playback prior to the end point of the list item, then press-
ing the PLAY$ $ button will simply resume playback from the cur-
rent position within the clip.
• If a clip with a “Manual” advance flag is at the end point of the list
item (either the marked OUT point or the physical end of the clip
if no OUT point is marked), then pressing the PLAY$ $ button will
cause the play list to advance to the next item in the play list. This
operates in the same manner as if the TAKE button had been
pressed.
■ Using the ##REW

## $$ Buttons in ON-AIR Mode
and FF$$
For safety reasons, these buttons are locked out from operating dur-
ing ON-AIR mode. This prevents an operator from accidentally
speeding through the play list. These buttons are located next to the 7
PLAY buttons, and could accidentally be pressed.
■ Using the #JOG and JOG$

$ Buttons in ON-AIR Mode:
These buttons are locked out during ON-AIR mode.
■ Using the Var Play & Shuttle Functions in ON-AIR Mode
These buttons are locked out during ON-AIR mode.
7-69
List Play Modify Operations

Once a play list is created, you can modify the items and attributes of
the items within the play list. To modify a play list, you first select the
LIST PLAY mode and then utilize the modification softkeys. The follow-
ing topics are included in this section:
• Removing Item(s) from a Play List

• Copying Item(s) from a Play List
• Pasting Item(s) into a Play List
• Altering the “Clip ID” in Play List Item(s)
• Altering the “Air Duration” in Play List Item(s)
• Altering the "Play/Hold" Advance Flag in Play List Item(s)
• Altering the "Auto/Manual" Advance Flag in Play List Item(s)
• Modifying a Play List in “On-Air” Mode
7-70
List Play
Removing Item(s) from a Play List

A single item can be removed from a play list by using the F1 Cut soft-
key. When items are removed from the list, they are placed into a tem-
porary buffer, so they can be placed elsewhere in this play list or even
into another play list (using the Paste function).
■ To cut a single item from the play list:

1. In sample menu (A) below, item 2 in the play list is selected.
2. Press softkey F1 Cut to remove the item, as shown in menu (B).
This action pulls up former item 3, 4 and 5 in the list, and renum-
bers them as 2, 3 and 4 respectively.
(A) (B)
L125: L125:

--0 –BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M --0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A --1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
>--2 –175601 00.00.00.30 P/A >--2 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A --3 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A --4 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A
--5 –-77459 00.00.01.32 P/A END

F5 ON-AIR F10 LIST FILES F5 ON-AIR F10 LIST FILES 7
7-71
Copying Item(s) from a Play List

A single item can be copied from a play list by using the F2 Copy soft-
key. When items are copied from the list, they are placed into a tempo-
rary buffer, so that they can be placed elsewhere in this play list or
even into another play list (using the Paste function).
■ To copy a single item from the play list:

2. Press softkey F1 Copy to copy the item. This action does not alter
the play list.
(A) (B)
L125: L125:

--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M --0 –BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A --1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
>--2 -175601 00.00.00.30 P/A >--2 -175601 00.00.00.30 P/A
--3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A --3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A --4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A
--5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A --5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A

7-72
List Play
Pasting Item(s) into a Play List

A single item can be pasted into a play list by using the F3 Paste soft-
key. When items are pasted into the list, the items are copied from the
temporary buffer and inserted into the current position in the play list.
■ To paste a single item from the copy buffer into the play list:
1. In sample menu (A) below, item 1 in the play list is selected. Previ-
ously, an item with Clip ID “175601” was copied into the copy
buffer.
2. Press softkey F3 Paste to insert the item (with Clip ID 175601) into
the current location in the play list. This inserts the new item after
the item that was selected and places the cursor on the newly pasted
item, as shown in menu (B) below.
(A) (B)
L125: L125:

--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M --0 –BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
>--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A --1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
--2 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A >--2 -175601 00.00.00.30 P/A
--3 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A --3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A --4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A
END --5 --77459 00.00.01.32 P/A

F2
F3
Copy
Paste
F7
F8
AirDur
Play/Hold
F2
F3
Copy
Paste
F7
F8
AirDur
Play/Hold
7
7-73
Altering the “Clip ID” in Play List Item(s)

The Clip ID of a single item may be replaced with a different clip ID by
using the F6 Clip-ID softkey.
■ To change the Clip ID in a single item in the play list:

2. Type the desired new Clip ID into the numeric keypad. For exam-
ple, type 7705.
3. Press softkey F6 Clip-ID to change the clip ID in the item, as shown
in menu (B). This action changes the Clip ID immediately.
(A) (B)
L125: L125:

--0 –BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M --0 –BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A --1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
>--2 –175601 00.00.00.30 P/A >--2 –--7705 00.00.00.30 P/A
--3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A --3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A --4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A
--5 –-77459 00.00.01.32 P/A --5 –-77459 00.00.01.32 P/A

Altering the “Air Duration” in Play List Item(s)

The Air Duration is the length of time that a list item plays. It can be
changed for each item in the list. When a new item is inserted into the
list, the Air Duration defaults to the length of the clip being inserted.
A new Air Duration can be set with the F7 Air-Dur softkey in the LIST
ITEM MODIFY menu, or by using the MARK IN and MARK OUT but-
tons to define only a portion of the clip to play back.
Any time the “Air-Dur” is different from the actual clip length, an aster-
isk (*) appears immediately before the air duration timecode value. The
7-74
List Play
only time this is not the case, is when the Air Duration value is
changed to a duration greater than the actual length of the clip and
there’s no Loop or Ping-Pong flag stored in the clip. In such a case, the
asterisk is replaced with the capital letter “F” to denote the fact that the
end of the clip will freeze during the airing of the clip.
■ To change the Air Duration in a single item in the play list:

2. Type the desired new Air Duration into the numeric keypad. For
example, type 1.15.
3. Press softkey F7 Air-Dur to change the Air Duration in the item, as
shown in menu (B). This action changes the Air Duration immedi-
ately.
(A) (B)
L125: L125:

--0 –BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M --0 –BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A --1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
>--2 –175601 00.00.00.30 P/A >--2 –175601 F00.00.01.15 P/A
--3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A --3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A --4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A
--5 –-77459 00.00.01.32 P/A --5 –-77459 00.00.01.32 P/A

F2
F3
Copy
Paste
F7
F8
AirDur
Play/Hold
F2
F3
Copy
Paste
F7
F8
AirDur
Play/Hold
7
Note: The letter “F” appears in front of the Air-Dur value to indicate that the set Air
Duration is longer than the clip length, and a “Freeze” will occur at the end of clip
playback, before the Air Duration expires.
Press Shift + CLEAR then F7 AirDur to clear the modified Air Dura-
tion and return to the original clip length. The “F” will be removed
from the Air Duration display.
7-75
■ To mark a segment of a clip to playback in the list:

1. Highlight the item in the list that you would like to modify.
2. Use any of the transport controls, jog/shuttle knob, or GOTO button
(enter a timecode value, then press GOTO) to find the first frame of
the segment you would like to mark.
3. Press the MARK IN button to mark the start of the segment for play-
back. You can also “set” an IN time by entering the timecode value
with the numeric keypad and pressing the MARK IN button.
4. Use any of the transport controls, jog/shuttle knob, or GOTO button
(enter a timecode value, then press GOTO) to find the last frame of
the segment you would like to mark.
5. Press the MARK OUT button to mark the end of the segment for
playback. You can also “set” an OUT time by entering the timecode
value with the numeric keypad and pressing the MARK OUT but-
ton.
The Air Duration will be updated in the list to reflect the duration of
the segment you have just marked for playback and an asterisk will
be displayed to indicate that it is not equal to the recorded clip
length.
(A) (B)
L125: L125:
(Air-Dur altered in item 2)
--0 –BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M --0 –BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A --1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
>--2 –175601 00.00.03.00 P/A >--2 –175601 *00.00.01.15 P/A
--3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A --3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A --4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A
--5 –-77459 00.00.01.32 P/A --5 –-77459 00.00.01.32 P/A

When this item is played from the list, it will now only play the
marked segment within the clip.
7-76
List Play
Press Shift + CLEAR then F7 AirDur to clear the segment Mark In

and Mark Out times and return to the original clip length. The aster-
isk will be removed from the Air Duration display.
Altering the "Play/Hold" Advance Flag in Play List Item(s)

The "Play/Hold" Advance flag sets whether or not the clip will automati-
cally “play” when it is cued to the On-Air channel.
• With the "Play/Hold" Advance flag set to Hold, the clip does not
automatically play when the item is presented to the air channel.
Pressing the TAKE button causes the clip to play for the Air Dura-
tion and then perform the action defined by the “Auto/Manual”
Advance flag.
• With the "Play/Hold" Advance flag set to Play, the clip will automat-
ically start to play as soon as it is presented to the air channel.
The default "Play/Hold" Advance flag for the first item inserted into an
empty list is always “Play” (P). When other items are inserted into a list,
they will carry the same "Play/Hold" Advance flag from the previously
selected item in the list.
The “Play/Hold” advance flag in a single item can be changed by using

the F8 Play/Hold softkey.
■ To change the “Play/Hold” advance flag in a single item in the play

list:
1. In sample menu (A) below, item 2 in the play list is selected. 7
2. Toggle softkey F8 Play/Hold to change the “Play/Hold” advance
flag in the item, as shown in menu (B). This action changes the
“Play/Hold” advance flag immediately. The softkey can be toggled
again to change the flag back to its original setting.
7-77
(A) (B)
L125: L125:

--0 –BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M --0 –BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A --1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
>--2 –175601 00.00.00.30 P/A >--2 –175601 00.00.00.30 H/A
--3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A --3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A --4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A
--5 –-77459 00.00.01.32 P/A --5 –-77459 00.00.01.32 P/A

Altering the "Auto/Manual" Advance Flag in Play List Item(s)

The “Auto/Manual” Advance flag sets how the next item in the list will
be brought into the On-Air channel.
• With the “Auto/Manual” Advance flag set to Auto (A), the next
item in the play list will automatically advance into the On-Air
channel.
• With the “Auto/Manual” Advance flag set to Manual (-), the clip in
the list item will play to the end of its Air Duration and hold on its
last frame. You must press the TAKE button to advance to the
next item in the play list.
The default “Auto/Manual” Advance flag for the first item inserted into
an empty list is always “Auto” (A). When other items are inserted into a
list, they will carry the same “Auto/Manual” Advance flag from the pre-
viously selected item in the list.
The “Auto/Manual” advance flag in a single item can be changed by

using the F9 Auto/Manual softkey.
7-78
List Play
■ To change the “Auto/Manual” advance flag in a single item in the

play list:
2. Toggle softkey F9 Auto/Manual to change the “Auto/Manual”
advance flag in the item, as shown in menu (B). This action changes
the “Auto/Manual” advance flag immediately. The softkey can be
toggled again to change the flag back to its original setting.
(A) (B)
L125: L125:

--0 –BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M --0 –BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A --1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
>--2 –175601 00.00.00.30 P/A >--2 –175601 00.00.00.30 P/M
--3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A --3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A --4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A
--5 –-77459 00.00.01.32 P/A --5 –-77459 00.00.01.32 P/A

Modifying a Play List in “On-Air” Mode 7

There is no method provided to modify a play list once the “On-Air”
mode is active. In order to modify the play list, the “On-Air” mode is
canceled by selecting the F5 EDIT softkey. The list may then be modi-
fied as described previously (see “List Play Modify Operations” on
page 7-70).
7-79
List Play File Operations

The List Play file operations allow you to Load or Save a single play
list. A single play list may be Moved, Copied, or Deleted. The List Play
Load and Save functions are accessed either through the LIST PLAY
mode menu softkeys, or can be accessed with control panel short-cuts.
• Loading a Stored Play List with List Play Softkeys

• Loading an Empty Play List with List Play Softkeys
• Loading a Play List with "Short-cut" Keys
• Saving a Play List with List Play Softkeys
• Archiving Contents of a Play List to Tape (or Disk)
Loading a Stored Play List with List Play Softkeys

You can load an existing (stored) play list by selecting the "List Files"
menu, entering the desired list ID, and then loading the selected play
list.
1. Select LIST PLAY mode by pressing the LIST PLAY button. This pre-
sents the LIST EDIT menu:

L--0:

>--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
END
F1 Cut F6 Clip-ID
F2 Copy F7 AirDur
F4 F9 Auto/Manual
7-80
List Play
2. In the LIST PLAY / EDIT menu, press the F10 LIST FILES softkey.
This selects the LIST PLAY / LIST FILES menu, and presents a new
set of softkeys.
LIST PLAY / LIST FILES EDIT

L--0:

>--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
END
F1 LoadList F6
F2 F7
F3 DeleteList F8
F4 F9
3. In the LIST PLAY / LIST FILES submenu, type the number of the
stored play list into the numeric keypad, then press the F1 LoadList
softkey. This loads the stored play list into the current workspace.

L-617:
ListID 617 Loaded
>--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M 7
--1 ---1805 00.00.00.15 P/M
--2 ---1806 * Missing P/M
--3 ---1807 00.00.00.15 P/M
--4 --26034 00.00.01.00 P/M
END
F1 LoadList F6
F2 F7
F3 DeleteList F8
F4 F9
7-81
Note: When a Clip ID does not exist for a list item, it is displayed as “Missing” in the Air
(Air Duration) column. If a missing clip is located on a remote Abekas 6000 server, it
needs to be “made local” by manually moving the clips included in the play list from
the remote server to the local server—using the MOVE function (see “Network Clip
Copy and Move Operations” on page 6-23).
Loading an Empty Play List with List Play Softkeys

You can load an empty play list by selecting the "List Files" menu,
defining the desired list ID, and then loading the selected list into the
workspace. From this empty list, new items can be added to the play
list and then subsequently stored.
1. Select LIST PLAY mode by pressing the LIST PLAY button. This pre-
sents the LIST EDIT menu:

L--0:

>--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
END
F1 Cut F6 Clip-ID
F2 Copy F7 AirDur
F4 F9 Auto/Manual
7-82
List Play
2. In the LIST PLAY / EDIT menu, press the F10 LIST FILES softkey.
This presents a new set of softkeys.

L--0:

>--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
END
F1 LoadList F6
F2 F7
F3 DeleteList F8
F4 F9
3. In the LIST PLAY / LIST FILES submenu, type the number of the
desired play list into the numeric keypad, choosing a List ID that
does not yet exist. Any number from 1 through 999 may be used.
List ID "0" is reserved for a "blank" workspace list when power is
first applied. In this example, type "24" into the keypad, and then
press the F1 LoadList softkey. This sets the current workspace list
to ID "24".

L-24: 7
ListID 24 Loaded
>--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
END
F1 LoadList F6
F2 F7
F3 DeleteList F8
F4 F9
7-83
Loading a Play List with "Short-cut" Keys

While in either CLIP PLAY mode or LIST PLAY mode, a new play list
may be directly selected by typing the List ID number into the numeric
keypad and then pressing the LIST PLAY button. This action selects the
LIST PLAY mode, selects the LIST PLAY / LIST EDIT menu, and loads
the defined play list.
1. The LIST PLAY / EDIT menu is selected by pressing the LIST PLAY
button (optional).

L--0:

>--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
END
F1 Cut F6 Clip-ID
F2 Copy F7 AirDur
F4 F9 Auto/Manual
7-84
List Play
2. The number "617" is typed into the numeric keypad, and then the
LIST PLAY button is pressed. This selects and loads list ID #617 into
the workspace:

L617:
ListID 617 Loaded
>--0 -BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ---1805 00.00.00.15 P/M
--2 ---1806 00.00.00.30 P/M
--3 ---1807 00.00.00.15 P/M
--4 --26034 00.00.01.00 P/M
END
F1 Cut F6 Clip-ID
F2 Copy F7 AirDur
F4 F9 Auto/Manual
Saving a Play List with List Play Softkeys

After creating a new list or modifying an existing list, it is a good idea
to save it to memory. Saving the list to memory will prevent it from
being lost if another List ID is recalled or the Abekas 6000 is rebooted.
You may save a play list that’s in the edit workspace by using the F5
SaveList and F10 SaveList As softkeys. There are several methods of 7
saving the play list using this softkey: saving to the same List ID; saving
to an existing list ID; and saving to a new list ID.
■ To save a list to the same list ID:

1. In List Play mode press F10 LIST FILES to select the LIST FILES
sub-menu.
2. Press F5 SaveList. The list in the Play List workspace is now saved
to the system disk and can be recalled at any time. A message will
be displayed above the Play List workspace and on the LCD display
on the control panel indicating which list ID has been saved.
7-85
Note: If you recall a list and make changes to it, the changes are saved only if you save
the list again. If you do not save the list after making changes, the original list (with-
out changes) is still available for recall.
■ To save a play list into a new List ID (by use of the F10 SaveList As
softkey):
1. From the LIST PLAY / EDIT menu, press the F10 LIST FILES soft-
key. This recalls the LIST FILES menu:

L12:

--0 –BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
>--2 –175601 00.00.00.30 P/A
--3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A
--5 –-77459 00.00.01.32 P/A
F1 LoadList F6
F2 F7
F3 DeleteList F8
F4 F9
2. Type into the numeric keypad the desired new List ID that you want
to save the list to. For example, if you want to save the current edit
workspace to List ID "12": type 12 into the numeric keypad.
7-86
List Play
3. Press the F10 SaveList As softkey. Assuming the list ID is not yet in
use, the system will store the play list to the indicated list ID. A mes-
sage is displayed, to confirm the "save as" operation. Notice also that
the new list ID is the current list in the edit workspace:

L12:
ListID 12 saved
--0 –BLACK- 00.00.00.00 H/M
--1 ----116 00.00.00.15 P/A
>--2 –175601 00.00.00.30 P/A
--3 ----549 00.00.00.15 P/A
--4 -----12 00.00.01.00 P/A
--5 –-77459 00.00.01.32 P/A
F1 LoadList F6
F2 F7
F3 DeleteList F8
F4 F9
Archiving Contents of a Play List to Tape (or Disk)

1. Connect the On-Air channel output to a VTR (or secondary Abekas
6000 channel) input.
2. Recall the list that you want to archive to tape (or disk).
3. Put the VTR (or secondary Abekas 6000 channel) into record.
7
4. Select the On-Air channel and play the list.
5. When the list is finished playing, stop the VTR (or secondary Abekas
6000 channel).
7-87
7-88
Symbols Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9, 7-12
(-) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Record elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
(+) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10, 7-13
(.) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 RS422 serial communications . .7-3, 7-4
Sony-master protocol . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
with 6000 as Recorder . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Numerics with VTR as Recorder . . . . . . . . . 7-10
0 - 9 buttons . . . ............... 2-14 AUTO EDIT button . . . . . . .2-21, 7-3, 7-10
00 button . . . . . ............... 2-14 AUTO EDIT SETUP menu . . . . . . 3-25, 7-4
18GB Disks . . . . ............... 1-11 Automation systems . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 7-15
25Mb/s . . . . . . . .1-6, 1-11, 1-13, 3-9, 4-17
36GB Disks . . . . ............... 1-12
4.1.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 1-11, 3-9, 4-17
B
4.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 1-11, 3-9, 4-17 BACKSPACE button . . . . . . . . . 2-13, 5-19
50GB Disks . . . . ............... 1-12 Backspace key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
50Mb/s . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 1-11, 3-9, 4-17 Board Number parameter . . . . . 3-14, 3-16
525 line standard . . . . . 1-8, 1-9, 1-11, 3-12 BROWSE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
625 line standard . . . . . 1-8, 1-9, 1-11, 3-12 Bypass button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
A C
A1, A2, A3 and A4 buttons . . . . . . . . 2-16 Ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Aborting a Copy / Move Operation . 6-32 Ch A thru Ch H buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Absolute frames notation . . . . . 2-14, 3-31 Ch A/B Tracks parameter . . . . . 3-13, 4-15
Acquire channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Ch C/D Tracks parameter . . . . . . . . . 3-13
All Ch button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Ch column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Array Online parameter . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Ch E/F Tracks parameter . . . . . . . . . 3-13
ATTRIBUTES button . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Ch G/H Tracks parameter . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Audio ChA (C,E,G) Pedestal parameter . . . . 3-15
4-track digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Uncompressed digital . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Acquiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Audio card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 1-9 Placing into a group . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Audio Connectors Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 1-9 Removing from a group . . . . . . . . 4-10
XLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 1-9 Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Audio I/O CHANNEL CONFIG menu . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Channel Configuration
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13, 4-16
Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Video+Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13, 4-14 I
Audio I/O parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Audio tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Video/Video . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13, 4-12
Auto Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 2-15, 2-17 CHANNEL CONTROLLERS Sub-Menu 3-41
Points to Know About . . . . . . . . 7-13 Channel Select
Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9, 7-12 LED Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Channel Select buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
E
Index: Abekas 6000 Operation
Channels parameter . . . . . . . . . 3-15, 3-16 Copying Clips

Chassis Select parameter 3-36, 3-38, 3-39, 3- Aborting a copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
40 Between Network Nodes . . . . . . .6-24
ChB (D,F,H) Pedestal parameter . . . . 3-15 Clearing From, Thru, and To Entry Fields
CHNL (Channel) Column . . . . . . . . . 3-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
CHNL (Channel) column 7-17, 7-20, 7-23, 7- Copying a Range of Clip IDs to a New
26 Clip ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
CLEAR button . . . . . . . . . . 2-13, 5-19, 6-32 Copying Single Clip ID to Another Clip
Clearing From, Thru, and To Entry Fields 6- ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
32 Packing function . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17
Clip Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 CPU RESET LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Clip Edit Delay parameter . . . . . 3-26, 3-30 Create new clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Clip elements Cueing Clips
Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Across the Network . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Clip ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-19, 3-5 Cue to the beginning . . . . . . . . . .5-25
CLIP ID button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 5-22 Cue to the end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Clip ID database . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, 1-13 Using the Arrow Buttons . . . . . . .5-23
Clip ID Locked button . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Using the Numeric Keypad . . . . . .5-22
CLIP PLAY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Current Date parameter . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Clip Play mode 2-5, 2-9, 2-11, 2-17, 4-5, 5-27 Current Time parameter . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Clip Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Cursor navigation keys . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Transport Functions . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Clip Preroll parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Clip TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 D
Clip Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Data mirroring option . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Composite video output . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 DDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 7-3
Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 DDR/VTR Panel button . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 DELETE button . . . . 2-12, 6-33, 6-35, 6-38
Control + C keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Deleting Clips
Control + Delete keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Aborting a Range Delete Operation 6-37
Control + Insert keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Deleting a Range of Clip IDs . . . .6-35
Control + Page Down keys . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Deleting a Single Clip ID . . . . . . .6-33
Control + Page Up keys . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Network Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
Control + S keys . . . . . . . . . .6-8, 6-9, 6-10 Device column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Control + Tab keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Diagnostic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Control + V keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 DIAGNOSTICS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Control + X keys . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7, 6-10 Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Control a VTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Disk Array Drive status . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 4-7, 4-8 Disk Array Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 DISK ARRAY MONITOR Sub-Menu . .3-38
Control panel protocol . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Disk Expansion Chassis . . . . . . 1-11, 1-12
Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, 1-13 Disk Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
COPY button . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 6-14, 6-26 Disk Storage
Additional Disk Drives . . . . . . . . .1-13
EE
Storage Capacity Table . . . . . . . . 1-11 External Control
Displayed Temp parameter . . . . . . . 3-37 Master/Slave switch 7-15, 7-18, 7-21, 7-24
Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Points to Know About . . . . . . . . . 7-27
DV25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 5-3 Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
DV25 Max Clip parameter . . . . . . . . 3-19 External edit controller . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
DV25 Total Disk parameter . . . . . . . 3-18
DV25 Total Free parameter . . . . . . . 3-19
DV50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 5-3 F
DV50 Max Clip parameter . . . . . . . . 3-19 F1 thru F10 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
DV50 Total Disk parameter . . . . . . . 3-19 f1/f2 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13, 5-19
DV50 Total Free parameter . . . . . . . 3-19 FANS ARRAY STATUS parameter . . . . 3-39
DVCPRO . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 1-11, 3-9, 4-17 FANS MONITOR Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . 3-39
DVCPRO-50 . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 1-11, 3-9, 4-17 Fast Forward button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
FF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Fibre Channel 1-5, 1-7, 1-13, 1-14, 2-6, 6-23
E Field 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Edit accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26, 3-30 field 1/field 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Edit Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 Field 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Configuring the RS422 Port . . . . . 7-25 File transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
RS422 Remote button . . . . . . . . . 7-26 FIND button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Edit Points Freeze
Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Freeze a frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Freeze button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16, 5-32
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Freeze function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 FRM/TC button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 5-19
Editing handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 From button 2-8, 2-13, 6-14, 6-19, 6-24, 6-29,
EE (electronics to electronics) . . . . . 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34, 6-36, 6-38
Enable button 2-21, 2-22, 7-3, 7-5, 7-7, 7-14, Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 4-5
7-27
ENBL (Enable) Column . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
ENBL (Enable) column 7-5, 7-20, 7-23, 7-26 G
Encode/decode card . . . . . . 1-8, 1-9, 1-13 General Purpose Interface . . . . . . . . . 7-28
End key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 GOTO
Engineering Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Goto a Mark IN or Mark OUT point 5-27
ENTER button 2-14, 6-10, 6-15, 6-20, 6-34, 6- Performing a Goto . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
38 Using a trim value . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Enter key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 GOTO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 7-13
GPI Control
ERROR LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Esc key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8, 6-10 Assign a channel to a GPI input . . 7-31 I
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, 1-14, 2-6, 6-23 Assign a channel to a GPI output . 7-34
Exit button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7, 3-6, 4-10 Assign a mode to a GPI input . . . 7-32
Expansion chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Assign a mode to a GPI output . . 7-35
Ext.LTC Input parameter . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Disable the GPI Inputs and Outputs . 7-
Ext.VITC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 30
EEE
GPI cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 I

List of GPI Input Mode functions . 7-33 I/O channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
List of GPI Output Mode functions 7-36 IN point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Select the GPI SETUP sub-menus . 7-28 In Range parameter . . . . . . . . . 3-36, 3-40
GPI Enable parameter . . . . . . . 3-32, 7-30 Input From . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
GPI IN ASSIGN menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Input Source parameter . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
CHANNEL column . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Insert button . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 2-9, 7-53
MODE column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Insert key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
GPI IN ASSIGN sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . 3-33 IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24, 6-28
GPI IN ASSIGN sub-menu . . . . . . . . 3-32
CHANNEL column . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
MODE column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 J
GPI input triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Jog button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19, 5-25
GPI Inputs Jog Duration parameter . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
assign a Channel and Mode . . . . . 3-33 Jog Forward button . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 5-25
GPI OUT ASSIGN menu . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 Jog Method
CHNL column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 Use search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
MODE column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 Use varplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
GPI OUT ASSIGN sub-menu . . . 3-32, 3-34 Jog Method parameter . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
GPI Output Jog Reverse button . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 5-25
assign a Channel and Mode . . . . . 3-34 Jog Speed parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Timecode start time . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
GPI output triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
GPI SETUP menu . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32, 7-29 K
GPI triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 K button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Group Key channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Selecting a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Key track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
GROUP button . . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 4-8, 4-10
L
H LED Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Handle Duration parameter . . . . . . . 3-10 Left Arrow key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Handle Enable parameter . . . . . . . . . 3-10 LIST button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11, 2-12
Hard disk drive List item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
backup system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 List Play
main system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Advance flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54
Hardware sub-assemblies . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Advnc column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47
Home key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Air-Dur column . . . . . . . . . 7-47, 7-54
HOME menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 AirDur softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49
Horiz Phase parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Archiving contents of a play list to tape
Hot swappability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 (or disk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-87
Auto/Manual Advance Flag . 7-66, 7-78
Auto/Manual function key . . . . . .7-49
Change the “Auto/Manual” advance flag
EL
7-79 Insert a clip with a marked segment 7-56
Change the “Play/Hold” advance flag 7- Insert an item at “Item 0” . . . . . . . 7-57
77 Insert an item at the END . . . . . . 7-58
Change the Air Duration in a single item Insert button 7-51, 7-53, 7-55, 7-56, 7-59
in the play list . . . . . . . . . 7-75 Item ">" Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Clear the modified Air Duration . 7-75 Item column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
CLIP ID button 7-53, 7-60, 7-61, 7-67, 7- Jog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60, 7-67
68 List Column Headings . . . . . . . . . 7-46
CLIP PLAY button . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65 LIST FILES softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Clip-ID column . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 LIST FILES sub-menu . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
ClipID softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49 List ID & Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Copy a single item from the play list List Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7-72 LIST PLAY button . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
Copy function key . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 Loading a Play List with "Short-cut" Keys
Create a new list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
Cue to a matching clip ID # 7-61, 7-68 Loading a Stored Play List with List Play
Cue to a specific list item . 7-60, 7-61, Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
7-68 Loading an Empty Play List with List Play
Cut a single item from the play list 7-71 Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Cut function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 LoadList softkey . . . . . . . . . . 7-50, 7-52
DeleteList function key . . . . . . . . 7-50 Mark a segment of a clip to playback in
END marker . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47, 7-58 the list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
ENTER button . . . . . . . . . . 7-60, 7-68 MARK IN button . . . . . 7-56, 7-74, 7-76
EXIT button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65 MARK OUT button . . .7-56, 7-74, 7-76
Exit button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 MENU button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
Expanded List Display . . . . . . . . 7-44 Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
F1 Copy softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72 Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
F1 Cut softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71 Menu Title Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
F1 LoadList softkey . . . . . . . 7-81, 7-83 Missing Clip IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
F10 LIST FILES softkey . . . . . . . . 7-81 Navigating the Play List in EDIT Mode
F10 LoadList softkey . . . . . . . . . . 7-45 7-60
F10 SaveList As softkey . . . . 7-85, 7-87 Navigating the Play List in ON-AIR Mode
F3 Paste softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
F5 EDIT softkey . . . . . . . . . 7-45, 7-65 Normal List Display . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
F5 ON-AIR softkey . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65 ON-AIR List Items . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
F5 SaveList softkey . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85 ON-AIR Menu Title . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
F6 Clip-ID softkey . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74 ON-AIR softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
F7 Air-Dur softkey . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74 ON-AIR Softkey Labels . . . . . . . . 7-65 I
F8 Play/Hold softkey . . . . . . . . . 7-77 Paste a single item from the copy buffer
F9 Auto/Manual softkey . . . 7-78, 7-79 into the play list . . . . . . . . 7-73
GOTO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76 Paste softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Insert a clip ID into a specific place 7-55 Pausing a list during playback . . . 7-67
Insert a clip ID placeholder . . . . . 7-59 Placeholder Clip ID . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
L
Play List Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 EDIT mode . . . . . . . . . . . .7-63

Play/Hold Advance flag . . . . 7-66, 7-77 Using the Var Play & Shuttle Functions in
Play/Hold softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49 ON-AIR Mode . . . . . . . . . .7-69
Presenting a Play List in ON-AIR Mode Var Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60, 7-67
7-65 LIST PLAY - EDIT menu . . . . . 7-43, 7-44
Recall a play list from the LIST PLAY / LIST PLAY - LIST FILES menu . 7-43, 7-50
EDIT menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52 LIST PLAY - ON-AIR menu . . . 7-43, 7-48
Recall a Play List in Clip Play mode 7-51 LIST PLAY button . . 2-12, 7-43, 7-44, 7-52
Recall the previous or next play list 7-53 List Play mode . . .2-9, 2-12, 2-17, 4-5, 4-6
Save a list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85 LIST PLAY- ON-AIR menu . . . . . . . . .7-64
Save a play list into a new List ID 7-86 LIST PLAY ON-AIR mode . . . . . . . . .7-51
SaveList As softkey . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 Lock the current Clip ID . . . . . . . . . .5-14
SaveList softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 2-15, 5-28
Saving a Play List with List Play Softkeys Setting a loop range . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
7-85 Louth automation system . . . . . 7-15, 7-28
Scroll through list items . . . . 7-60, 7-67 Configuring the RS422 Port . . . . . .7-16
SHIFT + LIST PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65 Louth protocol 1-6, 3-23, 3-29, 7-15, 7-17,
Shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60, 7-67 7-28
Softkey Labels . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46, 7-47 LTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Status overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 LTC IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40
TAKE button . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61, 7-68
Temporary Messages . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Transport Control of List Items in EDIT M
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61 Machine-to-machine edit . . . . . . 2-21, 7-3
TransportControl of List Items in ON-AIR MARK IN button 2-10, 2-13, 5-20, 7-8, 7-11,
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69 7-13, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49
Using the JOG and JOG Buttons in ON- MARK OUT button 2-10, 2-13, 5-20, 7-8,
AIR Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69 7-11, 7-13, 7-49
Using the JOG Buttons in EDIT Mode Marking clip segments . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
7-62 Marking on the fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Using the PLAY Button in EDIT Mode Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
7-62 Master channel . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-9, 4-16
Using the PLAY Button in ON-AIR Mode Master video signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69 Master/Slave switch . 7-15, 7-18, 7-21, 7-24
Using the REW and FF buttons in EDIT Media storage capacity . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63 MEDIA STORAGE parameter . . . . . . .3-18
Using the REW and FF Buttons in ON-AIR Menu
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69 Change a menu parameter setting . 3-7
Using the TAKE Button during List play- Menu button . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 3-4, 3-6, 7-44
back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67 Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Using the TAKE Button in EDIT Mode Menu Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
7-61 MODIFY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Using the Var Play & Shuttle functions in Monitor Sel parameter . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
LE
MOVE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11, 6-19 OUT point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Moving Clips Output mode . . . . 2-6, 2-16, 3-5, 5-7, 5-31
Aborting a move . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 Owner Name . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-4, 6-12
Between Network Nodes . . . . . . 6-28
Clearing From, Thru, and To Entry Fields
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 P
Moving a Range of Clip IDs to a New Clip Packing function . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17, 6-22
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 Page Down key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Moving a Single Clip ID to a New Clip ID Page Up key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Panel button . . . . . . . . 2-23, 7-4, 7-7, 7-14
Packing function . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 PANEL SETUP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Parity data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Parity Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
N Parity Status parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Net Delete parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Ping-Pong . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 2-15, 5-29
NetON indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 Setting a ping-pong range . . . . . . 5-30
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 PLAY + UP ARROW buttons . . . . . . . 7-53
copy clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Play Forward button . . . . . . . . . 2-17, 5-24
Copying Clips between Network Nodes Play List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
6-24 Play Repeat
Duplicate clip IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Assigning a Play Repeat mode to a clip
Moving Clips between Network Nodes 5-31
6-28 Play Repeat button . . . . . . . . . . 2-15, 5-31
Network + COPY buttons . . . . . 6-24, 6-27 Play Repeat mode . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15, 5-28
Network + MOVE buttons . . . . 6-28, 6-31 Play Reverse button . . . . . . . . . 2-16, 5-24
Network button 2-6, 5-24, 6-24, 6-27, 6-28, 6- Port column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
30, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Postroll . . . . . . . . . . 2-21, 2-22, 7-4, 7-10
Network Clip Database . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Postroll parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Network Connection Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Disable/Enable the Local Node’s Net- Power Supply
work Connection . . . . . . . 6-30 Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-4
Enable/Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 Hot-Swap redundant . . . . . . . 1-7, 1-13
Network Delete parameter . . . . . . . . 6-38 POWER SUPPLY MONITOR Sub-Menu 3-40
Networked Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Power Supply voltages . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Preroll . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21, 2-22, 7-4, 7-10
O
Odetics automation system . . . . . . . . 7-18
Present parameter . . .3-36, 3-38, 3-39, 3-40
Preview button . . . . . . . . . .2-21, 7-9, 7-12
I
Configuring the RS422 Port . . . . . 7-19 Project Name . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-4, 6-11
RS422 Remote button . . . . . . . . . 7-20 PROTOCOL column 3-23, 7-5, 7-17, 7-20,
Odetics protocol 1-6, 3-23, 3-29, 7-18, 7-20 7-22, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
ON-AIR button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 PT Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Open-ended limit parameter . . . . . . 3-10 PTOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
LEE
Q 7-22, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26
QWERTY Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 RS422 Ports 1-10, 2-21, 2-23, 3-22, 3-29, 3-41
QWERTY keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Master/Slave switch 7-15, 7-18, 7-21, 7-24
RS422 Remote button 2-6, 3-24, 7-18, 7-23,
7-27
R
RAID Level 3 . . . . . . . . . . .1-6, 1-11, 1-13
Range of clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
S
REC + AUTO EDIT buttons . . . . . 7-9, 7-12 Save Settings parameter . . . . . . 3-42, 4-20
REC button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7, 7-14 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Recall Settings parameter . . . . . 3-43, 4-20 Set a duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Record Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Settings parameter . . . . . . . . . . 3-42, 4-20
Record button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Shift + CLEAR buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Set a duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Shift + Control + Tab keys . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Record Duration Shift + Delete keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Shift + Insert keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Shift + LIST PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49
Record DV25/50 parameter . . . . . 3-9, 4-18 Shift + Tab keys . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5, 6-10
Record format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 4-17 Shift button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Record track enables Shuttle button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19, 5-25
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Recorder button . 2-22, 7-3, 7-7, 7-11, 7-14 Slave channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9, 4-16
Recording Slave key signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
A Still . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Slave Port parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Allocate an new clip ID . . . . . . . . . 5-9 SLIDE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Into an existing clip . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Slo-Mo Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Live or Frozen Video . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Configuring the RS422 Port . . . . . .7-22
Locking a clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 RS422 Remote button . . . . . . . . . .7-23
New Clip ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 SMPTE bars test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Next or Previous clip . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7, 7-47
Points to know about . . . . . . . . . 5-14 SOFTWARE VERSION parameter . . . .3-18
Ref.VITC Input parameter . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Sony-master protocol . . . . . . . . . 3-23, 7-5
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Sony-slave protocol 3-23, 3-29, 7-21, 7-23,
Remote New Trks parameter . . . . . . . 3-10 7-24
REMOTE TIMING SETUP menu . . . . 3-29 Src Clip Delay parameter . . . . . 3-27, 3-30
Remote V Enable parameter . . . . . . . 3-11 Src VTR Delay parameter . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Replace clip elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Status Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Review button . . . . . . . . . 2-22, 7-10, 7-13 Menu Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rewind button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17, 5-25 Transport Status Section . . . . . . . . 3-3
Right Arrow key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 STOP button . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 7-9, 7-13
Rotary Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19, 2-20 Sub-menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
RS422 PORT ASSIGN menu . . . 3-22, 3-24 Sub-menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7, 3-5, 3-7
RS422 PORT ASSIGN sub-menu 7-17, 7-19, System Diagnostics LED . . . . . . . . 2-4, 4-4
System Disk
LEEE
Primary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Timecode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Redundant Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Change the Timecode Threshold value
System H Phase parameter . . . . . . . . 3-14 5-16
System Inputs Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
AES/EBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Entering Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Analog LTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Field 1 to Field 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Frames to timecode . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
SDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Marking on the fly . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
System Outputs Timecode notation . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 3-31
AES/EBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Timecode Threshold value . . . . . . . . 5-16
Analog audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Analog video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 TITLE button . . . . . . . 2-11, 2-13, 6-4, 6-9
SDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Titling Clips
SYSTEM SETUP menu . . . . . . . 3-12, 7-39 ASCII Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
System Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 ASCII keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
SYSTEM STATUS menu . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fixing a Mistake . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Insert mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
T Options for Saving and Exiting . . . . 6-9
T.O.D. Source parameter . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Overlay mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Tab key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5, 6-10 Owner Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
TAKE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 3-6 Project Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
TC Field Report parameter . . . . . . . . 3-29 To title a clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
TC Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 To button . 2-8, 2-13, 6-15, 6-20, 6-25, 6-29
TC Threshold parameter . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Transport Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Temperature display Transport Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Celsius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 TruClip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 1-14
Fahrenheit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
TEMPERATURE MONITOR Sub-Menu 3-36
Temperature parameter . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 U
Test Patterns Ultra-2 LVD SCSI Interface . . . . . . . . 1-11
List of Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 UNDO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 5-19
Recall a test pattern . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Unlock the current Clip ID . . . . . . . . 5-14
Thru button . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 2-13, 6-36 Up Arrow button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16, 5-3 User Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Configure a channel pair . . 4-16, 7-38 User Channel parameter 3-9, 3-25, 3-29,
Play Time of Day . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40 4-18, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Points to Know About Time . . . . 7-41
Set up and start a Time Delay recording
User preference parameters . . . . . . . . 3-31
User Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
I
7-40 Cancel a parameter selection . . . . . 3-8
Time of Day timecode . . . . . . . . 7-40 Recall User 1-4 or Factory . . . . . . 4-20
Time Delay user menu setting . . . . . 7-39 Save current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Time of Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 7-40 USER SETUP main menu . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
TIME OF DAY PARAMETER . . . . . . . 3-20 USER SETUP menu parameters . . . . . . 3-6
EN
USER SETUP SAVE/RECALL menu .3-42, 4- W

19 Write protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19, 5-14
User Setup settings
Factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
User-1 thru User-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Y
User setup settings Yes/No button . . . . . 2-9, 6-17, 6-32, 6-37
Factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
User-1 thru User-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
V
V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Var Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16, 2-17
Defining a speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Entering speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Points to Know About . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Specify a decimal value . . . . . . . . 5-26
Specify a negative speed . . . . . . . 5-26
Var Play button . . . . . . . . 2-20, 5-25, 5-26
Variable Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
VGA Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Video and Key Record Formats
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Video Standard parameter . . . . . . . . . 3-12
VIDEO TIMING parameter . . . . . . . . 3-14
Video track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Video+Key 1-5, 2-16, 4-6, 4-8, 4-9, 4-14, 5-3,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Configure a channel pair . . . . . . . 4-15
Video/Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12, 5-3
Configure a channel pair . . . . . . . 4-13
Verify channel pair . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Virtual clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
VITC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
VITC reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
VKA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-11, 5-3
VTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 7-3
VTR Edit Delay parameter . . . . . . . . . 3-27
VTR Edit Port parameter . . . . . . . 3-25, 7-6
VTR Preroll parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
VTR to Server editing . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

A6000 Operation Guide

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

A6000 Operation Guide

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Abekas 6000

Publishing and Copyright Information

Abekas 6000 Installation & Maintenance

Safety and First Aid

Section 2: Control Panel Overview

Section 3: Status Overlay Menus

Section 4: Getting Started

Section 5: Clip Recording and Playback

Cueing a Clip using the Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Section 6: Clip Management

Inserting Items at the END of the Play List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58

The following sections are included in this manual:

• Section 1: Abekas 6000 MultiFlex DTV Server — overview of fea-

This Section contains

■ 2, 4, 6, or 8 independent video I/O channels

Expandable Video I/O Channels

The modular architecture of the Abekas 6000 provides a large measure

Clip Based Record Format

Expandable Local Storage

Expandable Networked Storage

VTR-Style Local Control

Louth and Odetics Automation Compatibility

RAID Level 3 Data Protection

Fibre Channel Networking

Hot Swappable Power Supplies

Redundant System Disks

• (2) Composite analog video outputs with Status Overlay

Data / External Control

Storage in Main Server Chassis

Abekas 6000 Network

When servers are connected via Ethernet, the TruClipTM clip-based

The topic covered in this section:

• Control Panel Navigation

Control Panel Navigation

Clip ID Timecode Clip TC Ext.VITC

To: 2700 Packing? NO

F2 F7 Exit From Thru V K A1 A2 A3 A4 Shuttle

Ch E Ch F CLIP ID 4 5 6 + JOG REC JOG

F3 F8 Shift To Yes / No Jog

Group All Ch MARK IN MARK OUT GO TO 0 00 FRM / TC ENTER TAKE

Control Panel are grouped by functionality. Some of the buttons are

Functional “displays” and “subpanels” described in this section include:

• Ch — displays the currently selected channel (A-H).

COPY CLIP From: 100 Thru: 110

Del DONE:OK From: 100 Thru:

RecDDR In= 00.00.00.00 Out= 00.00.05.00

Timecode / Numeric Display

Timecode Clip TC Ext.VITC

Hours Minutes Seconds Frames Output Mode

• Network — enables the Ethernet and Fibre Channel network con-

Channel Select / Softkey Subpanel

• Ch A thru Ch H — buttons acquire, select, and release any of the 8

Abekas 6000 HOME MENU (1/10)

ChA Server-171 ChA Server-171

POWER POWER POWER

SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP

Dialogue Control Subpanel

• Yes / No — Used to answer dialogue when performing move, delete

Clip Select Subpanel

Timecode Mark / Search Subpanel

MARK IN MARK OUT GO TO

• MARK IN — marks the timecode IN point for loop and ping-pong